You are on page 1of 1030

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System

V100R003C03

IDU Hardware Description


Issue

02

Date

2012-01-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document


Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name

Version

OptiX RTN 910

V100R003C03

iManager U2000

V100R006C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l

Network planning engineer

Hardware installation engineer

Installation and commissioning engineer

Field maintenance engineer

Data configuration engineer

System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l

Basics of digital microwave communication

Basics of the OptiX RTN 910

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

Symbol

Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in


Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

Convention

Description

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This document is the second issue for the V100R003C03 product version.
Compared with the first issue, the content updates are as follows.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Update

Description

Heading "Application" for each board

Added board application information.

Heading "Front Panel" for each system


control, switching, and timing board

Added alarm input/output principles.

A Differences Between General-Purpose


IF Boards

Added function comparison between general


IF boards.

Entire document

Fixed known bugs.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This document is the first issue for the V100R003C03 product version.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Network Application..........................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Components........................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Configuration Modes..........................................................................................................................................7

2 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................8
2.1 Chassis Structure................................................................................................................................................9
2.2 Installation Mode................................................................................................................................................9
2.3 Air Flow..............................................................................................................................................................9
2.4 IDU Labels.......................................................................................................................................................10

3 Boards............................................................................................................................................13
3.1 Board Appearance............................................................................................................................................15
3.2 Board List.........................................................................................................................................................16
3.3 CSTA................................................................................................................................................................23
3.3.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................23
3.3.2 Application..............................................................................................................................................23
3.3.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................24
3.3.4 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................28
3.3.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................31
3.3.6 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................41
3.3.7 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................43
3.3.8 Board Feature Code.................................................................................................................................43
3.3.9 Types of SFP Modules............................................................................................................................44
3.3.10 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................44
3.3.11 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................44
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC........................................................................................................................................48
3.4.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................48
3.4.2 Application..............................................................................................................................................48
3.4.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................49
3.4.4 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................59
3.4.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................62
3.4.6 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................77
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

3.4.7 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................79


3.4.8 Board Feature Code.................................................................................................................................80
3.4.9 Types of SFP Modules............................................................................................................................80
3.4.10 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................82
3.4.11 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................83
3.5 CSHD/CSHE....................................................................................................................................................91
3.5.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................91
3.5.2 Application..............................................................................................................................................91
3.5.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................92
3.5.4 Working Principle..................................................................................................................................100
3.5.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................104
3.5.6 DIP Switches and CF Card....................................................................................................................118
3.5.7 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................120
3.5.8 Board Feature Code...............................................................................................................................121
3.5.9 Types of SFP Modules..........................................................................................................................121
3.5.10 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................123
3.5.11 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................123
3.6 IF1...................................................................................................................................................................130
3.6.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................130
3.6.2 Application............................................................................................................................................130
3.6.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................131
3.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................133
3.6.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................138
3.6.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................140
3.6.7 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................140
3.6.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................141
3.7 IFU2................................................................................................................................................................142
3.7.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................142
3.7.2 Application............................................................................................................................................143
3.7.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................143
3.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................146
3.7.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................150
3.7.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................152
3.7.7 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................152
3.7.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................153
3.8 IFX2................................................................................................................................................................155
3.8.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................155
3.8.2 Application............................................................................................................................................155
3.8.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................156
3.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................159
3.8.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................163
3.8.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................165
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................166


3.8.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................167
3.9 ISU2................................................................................................................................................................169
3.9.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................169
3.9.2 Application............................................................................................................................................169
3.9.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................171
3.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................174
3.9.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................178
3.9.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................180
3.9.7 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................181
3.9.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................181
3.10 ISX2..............................................................................................................................................................185
3.10.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................185
3.10.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................185
3.10.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................187
3.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................190
3.10.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................194
3.10.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................197
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................197
3.10.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................198
3.11 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA....................................................................................................................203
3.11.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................203
3.11.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................203
3.11.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................205
3.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................209
3.11.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................211
3.11.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................218
3.11.7 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................218
3.11.8 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................220
3.11.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................221
3.12 EMS6............................................................................................................................................................226
3.12.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................226
3.12.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................226
3.12.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................227
3.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................232
3.12.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................234
3.12.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................239
3.12.7 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................240
3.12.8 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................240
3.12.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................241
3.13 EFP8.............................................................................................................................................................243
3.13.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................243
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

3.13.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................243
3.13.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................245
3.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................248
3.13.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................251
3.13.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................254
3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................255
3.13.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................255
3.14 SL1D/SL1DA...............................................................................................................................................256
3.14.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................256
3.14.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................256
3.14.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................258
3.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................260
3.14.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................262
3.14.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................264
3.14.7 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................265
3.14.8 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................265
3.14.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................265
3.15 ML1/MD1.....................................................................................................................................................267
3.15.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................267
3.15.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................267
3.15.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................268
3.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................270
3.15.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................273
3.15.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................276
3.15.7 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................277
3.15.8 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................277
3.15.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................277
3.16 SP3S/SP3D...................................................................................................................................................278
3.16.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................278
3.16.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................279
3.16.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................279
3.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................280
3.16.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................283
3.16.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................287
3.16.7 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................288
3.16.8 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................288
3.16.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................288
3.17 PIU................................................................................................................................................................289
3.17.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................289
3.17.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................290
3.17.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................290
3.17.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................291
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

3.17.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................293


3.17.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................293
3.18 FAN..............................................................................................................................................................293
3.18.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................293
3.18.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................294
3.18.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................294
3.18.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................295
3.18.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................296
3.18.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................297

4 Accessories..................................................................................................................................298
4.1 E1 Panel..........................................................................................................................................................299
4.2 PDU................................................................................................................................................................301
4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................301
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle..........................................................................................................302
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode......................................................................................................................303

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................305
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................307
5.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................307
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable..................................................................................................................................307
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................308
5.3 IF Jumper........................................................................................................................................................309
5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................310
5.5 Fiber Jumper...................................................................................................................................................311
5.6 STM-1 Cable..................................................................................................................................................313
5.7 E1 Cables........................................................................................................................................................314
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment...................................................................................314
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel.....................................................................................................318
5.8 Orderwire Cable.............................................................................................................................................320
5.9 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................320

A Differences Between General-Purpose IF Boards..............................................................324


B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................325
C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................327
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board................................................................347
E Parameters Description............................................................................................................349
E.1 Parameters for Network Management............................................................................................................350
E.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................350
E.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching..........................................................................................350
E.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation............................................................................................355
E.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs...................................................................357
E.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization......................................................................358
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

E.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time............................................361


E.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management............................................................362
E.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management..............................................................................363
E.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs.......................................364
E.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................365
E.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting..................................................365
E.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration........................................366
E.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.......368
E.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC..................................370
E.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management...................................................................371
E.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test.............................................372
E.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management........................374
E.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.........375
E.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.................................376
E.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.................377
E.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP.............................................................382
E.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.................................................383
E.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas..............384
E.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually
Aggregated................................................................................................................................................385
E.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting................................................................................386
E.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter......................................386
E.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table.........................................................387
E.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel.............................................................388
E.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters...............................................392
E.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management......................................393
E.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..........................................................394
E.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control.....................................................394
E.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control......................................................395
E.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management..........................................................................396
E.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control.....................................................................................397
E.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management....................................................................................398
E.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management............................................................................398
E.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation............................................................399
E.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control...............................................................................401
E.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation..........................................................402
E.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server.............................................403
E.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function............................................404
E.2 Radio Link Parameters...................................................................................................................................405
E.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation............................................405
E.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC...............................................................................410
E.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create....................................................................................417
E.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection................................................................................................418
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

E.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create................................................................................420


E.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection.............................................................................................423
E.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group....................................................427
E.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA................................................................................427
E.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration.......................................................................428
E.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters.......................................................................................................438
E.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation......................................................................................438
E.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP.....................................................................................................442
E.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters.......................................................................................................................446
E.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation.............................................................446
E.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation.....................................448
E.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
........................................................................................................................................................................452
E.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration............................................................................456
E.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control.....................................................................................458
E.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion............................................................................................461
E.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces.....................................................................................................................462
E.5.1 Parameter Description: Working Modes of Ports.................................................................................462
E.5.2 PDH Port Parameters............................................................................................................................463
E.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes...................................................................463
E.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes...........................................................464
E.5.3 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................468
E.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.......................................................468
E.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control............................................................473
E.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................475
E.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes...........................................................479
E.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................480
E.5.4 Serial Port Parameters...........................................................................................................................483
E.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes...................................................................483
E.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.......................................................484
E.5.5 Microwave Interface Parameters...........................................................................................................485
E.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes...................................................485
E.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................486
E.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes...............................................488
E.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................490
E.5.6 IF Board Parameters..............................................................................................................................493
E.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute........................................................................493
E.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................501
E.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes.................................503
E.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records....................................................................504
E.5.6.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................505
E.5.7 ODU Parameters...................................................................................................................................506
E.5.7.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute...........................................506
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

E.5.7.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes...........................................................507


E.5.7.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information................................................511
E.5.7.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes.....................................................512
E.5.8 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards...................................................................................................513
E.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................514
E.5.8.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................515
E.5.9 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards...................................................................................................516
E.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports...............................................................................................516
E.5.9.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................519
E.5.10 Parameters for Overhead.....................................................................................................................520
E.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead.............................................................520
E.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs..........................................................................................521
E.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs........................................................................................523
E.5.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces............................................................................524
E.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane...............................................527
E.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................527
E.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation........................................................................527
E.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service........................................................................................548
E.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation.............559
E.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation.......................................................................560
E.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service.......................................................................................566
E.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation...............................................................................577
E.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation..................................................................577
E.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services..................................................................................585
E.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols.........................................................................................................590
E.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation.................................................................590
E.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................593
E.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation...........................................599
E.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration...................................601
E.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters.............................................601
E.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters................................................607
E.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST...............609
E.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation......................617
E.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................625
E.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT................................................626
E.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT.................................628
E.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.......................................628
E.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT.........................631
E.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM.........................................................................................................635
E.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................635
E.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................636
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

E.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation............................637


E.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation...............638
E.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation.............................639
E.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling...............................639
E.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling...............................641
E.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection............643
E.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter..............................644
E.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
..................................................................................................................................................................646
E.6.4 QoS Parameters.....................................................................................................................................647
E.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management...............................................................647
E.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create..................................................653
E.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification........................................660
E.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management................................................................................662
E.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy..............................................................................................668
E.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration..................................675
E.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.....................................................686
E.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane.....................................687
E.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................688
E.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation.............................................................688
E.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services
..................................................................................................................................................................691
E.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service.............................................................................695
E.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE
802.1d/802.1q Bridge...............................................................................................................................698
E.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN
Service......................................................................................................................................................701
E.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service............................................................................706
E.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation............................................................712
E.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries.........................................713
E.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols.........................................................................................................714
E.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation.................................................................714
E.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................717
E.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling.........................................................723
E.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters.........................................................724
E.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters.............................................................725
E.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information.........................................727
E.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information.............................................728
E.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute................................................729
E.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling......................................................730
E.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries
..................................................................................................................................................................731
E.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries
..................................................................................................................................................................732
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

E.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs....................................733


E.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation....................................735
E.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT................736
E.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.......737
E.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation.......................................................................738
E.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM.........................................................................................................739
E.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs..............................................739
E.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs..............................................740
E.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs...............................................741
E.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB....................................................743
E.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT.....................................................744
E.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter....................................................745
E.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.............................746
E.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter......................................747
E.7.4 QoS Parameters.....................................................................................................................................748
E.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows....................................................748
E.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR......................................................750
E.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS.......................................................752
E.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS.............................................754
E.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues.................754
E.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping............................................................756
E.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................757
E.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port...................................................................757
E.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port.....................................................................764
E.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames...................................................................770
E.8 RMON Parameters.........................................................................................................................................771
E.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group............................................................771
E.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................772
E.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group.................................................773
E.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................774
E.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services...........................................................................................................776
E.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.....................................................................................................................776
E.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels................................................776
E.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel..........................................777
E.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.......782
E.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels..........786
E.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters...................................790
E.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI.........................................................796
E.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping................................................796
E.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute......................................799
E.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management......................................................802
E.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation....................................................807
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

E.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM................................................................818


E.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping..................................................................822
E.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute........................................................825
E.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management....................................................827
E.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation......................................................830
E.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation...................................................835
E.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation.........846
E.9.2 CES Parameters.....................................................................................................................................852
E.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management......................................................................852
E.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation......................................................861
E.9.3 ATM Parameters...................................................................................................................................874
E.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management.............................874
E.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration............................879
E.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status.........................................881
E.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status...........................................882
E.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management........................882
E.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table...........................884
E.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation...........886
E.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management......................................................................887
E.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation......................................................892
E.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management..................................................................897
E.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation..................................................907
E.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes......................919
E.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status.................................923
E.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status...................926
E.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID..........................................................929
E.10 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................930
E.10.1 Parameter Description: Frequency Selection Mode............................................................................930
E.10.2 Physical Clock Parameters..................................................................................................................931
E.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.................................................................931
E.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port
..................................................................................................................................................................933
E.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet....................................................935
E.10.2.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality...................................................938
E.10.2.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control.........................................941
E.10.2.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.................................942
E.10.2.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters.........943
E.10.2.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching..............................945
E.10.2.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions...........946
E.10.2.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source..............947
E.10.2.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status............................................................950
E.10.3 CES ACR Clock Parameters...............................................................................................................951
E.10.3.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source...............................................................................952
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Contents

E.10.3.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain......................................................................................952


E.10.3.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation.......................................................................953
E.10.4 PTP Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................954
E.10.4.1 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Attribute..........................................................954
E.10.4.2 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Attribute_Creation of PTP Clock Ports..........964
E.10.4.3 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_Clock Subnet.....................................965
E.10.4.4 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_BMC..................................................966
E.10.4.5 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Basic Attributes...................................................967
E.10.4.6 Parameter Description: External Time Port_BMC....................................................................968
E.10.4.7 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Cable Transmission Distance..............................970
E.10.5 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..............................................................................................971
E.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...............................................................................972
E.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General........................................................................................972
E.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced....................................................................................974
E.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port................................................................................975
E.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port....................................................................975
E.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface................................................................976

F Glossary.......................................................................................................................................980
F.1 0-9...................................................................................................................................................................981
F.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................981
F.3 F-J...................................................................................................................................................................990
F.4 K-O.................................................................................................................................................................995
F.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................1001
F.6 U-Z...............................................................................................................................................................1010

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

Introduction

About This Chapter


The OptiX RTN 910 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series.
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave
transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission
solution for mobile communication network or private networks.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Configuration Modes
The OptiX RTN 910 supports different configuration modes in which different system control,
switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs are configured, suited for various microwave
application scenarios.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

1.1 Network Application


The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave
transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission
solution for mobile communication network or private networks.

OptiX RTN 900 Product Family


There are three types of OptiX RTN 900 products: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, and OptiX
RTN 980. Users can choose the product best suited for their site.
l

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.
NOTE

All the products in the OptiX RTN 900 series use the same types of IF and service interface boards.

The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily and
configured flexibly. The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a solution that can integrate TDM
microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave technologies according to the
networking scheme for the sites, achieving smooth upgrade from TDM microwave to Hybrid
microwave, and from Hybrid microwave to Packet microwave. This solution is able to adapt to
changing service scenarios brought about by evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore,
this solution meets the transmission requirements of 2G and 3G networks while also allowing
for integration with future LTE and 4G networks.

OptiX RTN 910


The OptiX RTN 910 is microwave equipment deployed at the access layer. Figure 1-1 shows
the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910.
Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910

FE

E1/
STM-1

E1
E1

FE
E1/
STM-1

E1

Regional TDM
Network
FE/GE

E1
FE/GE

Regional Packet
Network
FE/GE

E1
FE

FE

OptiX RTN 910

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

E1

MSTP

NodeB

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS

RNC

BSC

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

NOTE

l In this solution, the OptiX RTN 910 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaul
network.
l The OptiX RTN 910 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the
regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM)
network or packet switching network (PSN).
l The OptiX RTN 910 supports the Ethernet over SDH (EoSDH) function and Ethernet over PDH
(EoPDH) function. Therefore, packet services can be backhauled through a TDM network.
l The OptiX RTN 910 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology. Therefore,
TDM, ATM, and Ethernet services can be backhauled through a PSN.
l The OptiX RTN 910 supports the VLAN sub-interface function. Therefore, MPLS packet services can
be backhauled through a Layer 2 network.
l When three or more microwave directions are required, cascade several sets of the OptiX RTN 910 or use
the OptiX RTN 950 or OptiX RTN 980 that provides more powerful functions and supports more microwave
directions.

1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.

IDU 910
The IDU 910 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 910 system. It receives and multiplexes
services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and
communications function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910.
Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 910
Item

Description

Chassis height

1U

Pluggable

Supported

Number of microwave
directions

1 or 2

RF configuration mode

1+0 non-protection configuration


2+0 non-protection configuration
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration (N = 1)
XPIC configuration

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 910

ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies
signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
the entire frequency band from 6 GHz to 42 GHz.
NOTE

Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz
frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing.

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs that the OptiX RTN 910 supports
Item

Description
Standard Power
ODU

High-Power ODU

Low Capacity for


PDH ODU

ODU type

SP, SPA

HP, HPA

LP

Frequency band

7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/38 GHz (SP
ODU)

6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/
15/18/23/26/28/32/3
8 GHz (HP ODU)

7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz (LP ODU)

6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (SPA ODU)

7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz (HPA ODU)

QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM

Microwave
modulation scheme

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

QPSK/16QAM

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Item

1 Introduction

Description

Channel spacing

Standard Power
ODU

High-Power ODU

Low Capacity for


PDH ODU

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

7/14/28/40/56 MHz
(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1
8/23/26/28/32/38
GHz)

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

7/14/28 MHz (10.5


GHz)

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs that the OptiX RTN 910 supports
Item

Description
High-Power ODU

Low Capacity for PDH


ODU

ODU type

XMC-2

XMC-1

Frequency band

7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32
/38/42 GHz

7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz

Microwave modulation
scheme

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/
64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing

7/14/28/40/56 MHz

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l

The direct mounting method is generally adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna,
the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for
one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hence referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting
method.
The direct mounting method can also be adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
dual-polarized antenna is used. Two ODUs are mounted onto an antenna using an
orthogonal mode transducer (OMT). The method for installing an OMT is similar to that
for installing a hybrid coupler.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

Figure 1-3 Direct mounting

The separate mounting method is adopted when a large- or medium-diameter and singleor dual-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate mounting method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted (two ODUs share one feed boom).
Figure 1-4 Separate mounting

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 provides an antenna solution that covers the entire frequency band, and supports
single-polarized antennas and dual-polarized antennas with diameters of 0.3 m to 3.7 m along with the
corresponding feeder system.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

1.3 Configuration Modes


The OptiX RTN 910 supports different configuration modes in which different system control,
switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs are configured, suited for various microwave
application scenarios.
Table 1-4 Configuration modes that the OptiX RTN 910 supports
Configuration
Mode

Control,
Switching,
and Timing
Board

IF Board

ODU

Application

PDH
microwave
equipment

CSTA

IF1

Low capacity
for PDH ODU

Provides a radio
link with
capacity not
higher than 16 x
E1.

SDH
microwave
equipment

CSTA

IF1

Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU

Provides an
STM-1 radio
link or a highcapacity PDH
radio link.

CSTA

ISU2

Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU

Provides one or
two STM-1
radio links.

Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU

Provides a
Integrated IP
radio link.

Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU

Provides a
Integrated IP
radio link of the
super capacity.

ISX2
Integrated IP
microwave
equipment

CSHA

IFU2

CSHB

ISU2

CSHC
CSHD
CSHE

XPIC Integrated
IP microwave
equipment

CSHA

IFX2

CSHB

ISX2

CSHC
CSHD
CSHE

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

Chassis

About This Chapter


The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is a 1U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 910 chassis are 44 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
910 chassis has a two-layered structure that is air cooled.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 910 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
2.3 Air Flow
An IDU 910 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
2.4 IDU Labels
Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

2.1 Chassis Structure


The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 910 chassis are 44 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
910 chassis has a two-layered structure that is air cooled.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 910.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910

H
D

2.2 Installation Mode


The IDU 910 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
The IDU 910 can be installed:
l

In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet

In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet

In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet

In a 19-inch open rack

In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment

On a wall

On a table

2.3 Air Flow


An IDU 910 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 910 chassis.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 910 chassis

2.4 IDU Labels


Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels
Label

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Label Name

Description

ESD protection
label

Indicates that the


equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.

Grounding label

Indicates the
grounding position
of the IDU chassis.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

Label

Label Name

Description

Fan warning label

Warns you not to


touch fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.

High temperature
warning label

Indicates that the


board surface
temperature may
exceed 70C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55C.
Wear protective
gloves to handle
the board.

Power caution label

Instructs you to
read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
For details, see
Labels in 3.17.4
Front Panel.

/ QUALIFICATION CARD

Qualification card
label

Indicates that the


equipment has
been quality
checked.

RoHS label

Indicates that the


equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.

HUAWEI

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

Label

!
W A R N IN G
-48V O U T P U T
TURN O FF PO W ER BEFO RE
D IS C O N N E C T IN G IF C A B LE

Label Name

Description

Product nameplate
label

Indicates the
product name and
certification.

Operation warning
label

The ODU-PWR
switch must be
turned off before
the IF cable is
removed.

Operation guidance
label

Instructs you to
slightly pull the
switch lever
outwards before
setting the switch
to the "I" or "O"
position.

PULL

Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 910.
Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 910 labels
/ QUALIFICATION CARD

HUAWEI

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

W A R N IN G
!
-48V O U T PU T
T U R N O FF P O W ER B EF O R E
D ISC O N N EC TIN G IF C AB LE

PULL

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Boards

About This Chapter


The IDU 910 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan
boards.
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 910 chassis are 20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm.
3.2 Board List
The IDU 910 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
The CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC differ from each other with regard to the types and number of
service ports.
3.5 CSHD/CSHE
The CSHD/CSHE is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board. The
difference between the CSHD and CSHE is that the GE ports on the CSHD support pluggable
SFP optical/electrical modules, while the GE ports on the CSHE are fixed electrical ports.
3.6 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.7 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.9 ISU2
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.10 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.11 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE
electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/
EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed
electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore
can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the
EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
3.12 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.
3.13 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
3.14 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide
STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by
the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.
3.15 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
3.16 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.17 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.
3.18 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.1 Board Appearance


The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 910 chassis are 20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm.
NOTE

The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.

Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 910 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board

H
D

Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code

0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Internal code
Board version
Board name
Board feature code

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,
the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module
being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the
impedance of E1 ports.

3.2 Board List


The IDU 910 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD)

NOTE

"EXT" represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.

Table 3-1 List of the IDU boards


Board
Acronym
CSTA

Board Name

Valid Slot

Description

TDM control,
switching, and
timing board

Slot 1

l Provides full time division cross-connections for


VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8
VC-4s.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and supports
one external clock input/output function.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1
interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1
optical/electrical interfaces.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous
data interface, one synchronous data interface, and
three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that
shares a port with the external clock interface.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Board
Acronym
CSHA

3 Boards

Board Name

Valid Slot

Description

Hybrid control,
switching, and
timing board

Slot 1

l Provides full time division cross-connections for


VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8
VC-4s.
l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capability.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and supports
one external clock input/output function and one
external time input/output function. The external
time interface shares a port with the external clock
interface.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1
interfaces.
l Provides two FE electrical interfaces.
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are
compatible with the FE electrical interface.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous
data interface, one synchronous data interface, and
three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that
shares a port with the external clock interface.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Board
Acronym
CSHB

3 Boards

Board Name

Valid Slot

Description

Hybrid control,
switching, and
timing board

Slot 1

l Provides full time division cross-connections for


VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8
VC-4s.
l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capability.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and supports
one external clock input/output function and one
external time input/output function. The external
time interface shares a port with the external clock
interface.
l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1
interfaces.
l Provides two FE electrical interfaces.
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are
compatible with the FE electrical interface.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous
data interface, one synchronous data interface, and
three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that
shares a port with the external clock interface.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Board
Acronym
CSHC

3 Boards

Board Name

Valid Slot

Description

Hybrid control,
switching, and
timing board

Slot 1

l Provides full time division cross-connections for


VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8
VC-4s.
l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capability.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and supports
one external clock input/output function and one
external time input/output function. The external
time interface shares a port with the external clock
interface.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1
interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1
optical/electrical interfaces.
l Provides two FE electrical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical
interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
electrical interfaces.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous
data interface, and three-input and one-output
external alarm interfaces.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that
shares a port with the external clock interface.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Board
Acronym
CSHD

3 Boards

Board Name

Valid Slot

Description

Hybrid control,
switching, and
timing board

Slot 1

l Provides full time division cross-connections for


VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8
VC-4s.
l Provides the 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching capability.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and time
processing function, supports one external clock
input/output and two external time inputs/outputs.
The first external time interface shares a port with
the external clock interface.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM/Smart
E1 interfaces. Supports Native E1, CES E1, ATM/
IMA E1, and Fractional E1.
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical
interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
electrical interfaces.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous
data interface, one synchronous data interface, and
three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that
shares a port with the orderwire phone interface and
the second external time interface.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Board
Acronym
CSHE

3 Boards

Board Name

Valid Slot

Description

Hybrid control,
switching, and
timing board

Slot 1

l Provides full time division cross-connections for


VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8
VC-4s.
l Provides the 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching capability.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and time
processing function, supports one external clock
input/output and two external time inputs/outputs.
The first external time interface shares a port with
the external clock interface.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM/Smart
E1 interfaces. Supports Native E1, CES E1, ATM/
IMA E1, and Fractional E1.
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
electrical interfaces.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous
data interface, one synchronous data interface, and
three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that
shares a port with the orderwire phone interface and
the second external time interface.

ISU2

Universal IF
board

Slot 3/4

l Provides one IF interface.


l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported service modes are Native
E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH
(1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1).
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA)
function.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Board
Acronym
ISX2

3 Boards

Board Name

Valid Slot

Description

Universal XPIC
IF board

Slot 3/4

l Provides one IF interface.


l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported service modes are Native
E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH
(1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1).
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA)
function.

IF1

SDH IF board

Slot 3/4

l Provides one IF interface.


l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave solution
and the STM-1-based SDH microwave solution.

IFU2

Universal IF
board

Slot 3/4

l Provides one IF interface.


l Supports integrated IP microwave.
l Supports the AM function.

IFX2

Universal XPIC
IF board

Slot 3/4

l Provides one IF interface.


l Supports integrated IP microwave.
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function.

SL1D

2xSTM-1
interface board

Slot 3/4

Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/


electrical interfaces.

SL1DA

2xSTM-1
interface board

Slot 3/4

Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/


electrical interfaces.

EM6T/EM6TA

6-port RJ45
Ethernet/
Gigabit Ethernet
interface board

Slot 3/4

l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

4-port RJ45 + 2port SFP Fast


Ethernet/
Gigabit Ethernet
interface board

Slot 3/4

8-port RJ45 FE
EoPDH
processing
board with the
switching
function

Slot 3/4

EM6F/EM6FA

EFP8

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are


compatible with the FE electrical interface.
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical
interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
electrical interfaces.
l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces.
l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE
interface.
l Supports the processing of EoPDH services.
l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Board
Acronym
EMS6

ML1

3 Boards

Board Name

Valid Slot

Description

4-port RJ45 and


2-port SFP FE/
GE EoSDH
processing
board with the
switching
function

Slot 3/4

l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

16xE1 (Smart)
tributary board

Slot 3/4

l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or


electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
l Supports the processing of EoSDH services.
l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1
interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.

MD1

32xE1 (Smart)
tributary board

Slot 3/4

l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1


interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.

SP3S

16xE1 tributary
board

Slot 3/4

Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1


interfaces.

SP3D

32xE1 tributary
board

Slot 3/4

Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1


interfaces.

PIU

Power board

Slot 5

Provides two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.

FAN

Fan board

Slot 6

Cools and ventilates the IDU.

3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.

3.3.1 Version Description


The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.

3.3.2 Application
CSTA boards function as system control, switching, and timing boards on OptiX RTN 910 NEs
building TDM radio networks. In this scenario, CSTA boards also receive and transmit E1/
STM-1 services.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-4 Application scenario of CSTA boards


IF
board

CSTA

IF
board

TDM radio network

TDM
service
board

E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1

CSTA

IF
board

IF
board

CSTA

TDM
service
board

E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards, or general-purpose IF boards or XPIC
IF boards working in SDH radio mode.
l TDM service boards shown in the preceding figure can be E1 interface boards or STM-1 interface
boards.
l If a TDM radio network needs to transmit a small number of FE/GE services, these services must be
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before being transmitted.

3.3.3 Functions and Features


The CSTA provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,
and clock processing functions. The CSTA provides PDH/SDH service ports, auxiliary ports,
and management ports.
Table 3-2 to Table 3-4 list the functions and features that the CSTA supports.
Table 3-2 Functions and features

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Supports full time division cross-connections


(equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4
level.

Cross-connect
capacity

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

Clock

3 Boards

Description

System control
and
communication

Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of


the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.

Clock
synchronization
at the physical
layer

Provides the system clock and frame headers for


service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
The traced clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Radio link clock

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

External clock
port

Outband DCN

Supports a maximum of seven DCCs.

SDH service functions

See Table 3-3.

PDH service functions

See Table 3-4.

Auxiliary ports
and
management
ports

Ethernet NM
port

NM serial port

NE cascading
port

Orderwire
phone port

Asynchronous
data port

Synchronous
data port

External alarm
port

Three inputs and one output

The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than


19.2 kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with
RS-232.

The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its


specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

OM

3 Boards

Description

Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

In-service
FPGA loading

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

Board voltage
detection

Supported

Detection of
indicators on the
other boards

Supported

Pluggable CF
card

Supported

The specifications of port comply with RS-485.

Table 3-3 provides details about the SDH service functions that the CSTA supports.
Table 3-3 SDH service functions

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical


signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Port specifications

l Supports SFP optical modules and SFP electrical


modules.
l Supports the optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and
L-1.2 types when using SFP optical modules. The
characteristics of all the optical ports comply with
ITU-T G.957.
l Supports 75-ohm STM-1 electrical ports when
using SFP electrical modules. The performance of
the electrical ports complies with ITU-T G.703.

Protection

Clock

Linear MSP

Supported

SNCP

Supported

Clock source

Each SDH line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN

Outband DCN

Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is


composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types:


l Outloops at optical/electrical ports
l Inloops at optical/electrical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops on VC-4 paths

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Setting of the
on/off state of a
laser

Supported

Automatic laser
shutdown
(ALS) functiona

Supported

Detection and
query of SFP
optical module
information

Supported

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:


l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

Table 3-4 provides details about the PDH service functions that the CSTA supports.
Table 3-4 PDH service functions
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives and transmits E1 signals.

Port
specifications

75-ohm/120ohm E1 port

16

Clock

Clock source

Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the


first or fifth E1 signal.

Clock
protection

Supports clock protection based on clock source


priorities.

E1 retiming
function

Supported

Loopback

Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

PRBS tests at E1
ports

Supported

OM

3.3.4 Working Principle


The CSTA consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock
unit, service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the CSTA
STM-1 signal
processing unit

SDH signal

E1 signal
processing unit

E1 signal

Backplane

VC-4
signal
VC-4 signal

Cross-connect
unit

VC-4
signal

TDM service board

Control bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
NE cascading port

Orderwire phone port

Monitoring signal

External alarm port

Auxiliary interface unit

Asynchronous/
Synchronous data port

Clock signal received


from other boards

System control
and
communication
unit

Clock unit

Clock signal
received from
the service unit
on the board

Clock signal provided


to other boards

Clock signal
provided to
the other units
on the board

External clock signal

Port for monitoring an


outdoor cabinet/Clock port
Power supplied to
the other units on
the board

Power
supply
unit

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans

System Control and Communication Unit


The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l

The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.

The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.

The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.

The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.

The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.

The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.

The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.

The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines

Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-6 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-6 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit

Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC

SinkTDM
service unit

Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

E1 Signal Processing Unit


The E1 signal processing unit allows access of, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical
signals and processes clock overheads. Signal processing on this unit is the same as that on the
SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

STM-1 Signal Processing Unit


The STM-1 signal processing unit allows access of STM-1 signals, extracts clock signals,
restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, and processes overheads and pointers. Signal
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

processing on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as that on the SL1D. For details, see
3.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.

Auxiliary Interface Unit


The auxiliary interface unit processes inputs and outputs of the orderwire phone port,
asynchronous data port, synchronous data port, and external alarm port. The port for monitoring
an outdoor cabinet and the clock/time port share one port.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.

3.3.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, service ports, management ports, auxiliary ports, buttons, and labels on the
front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

LOS1
LOS2

1
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV

CSTA

Figure 3-7 Front panel of the CSTA

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

STM-1
CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

E1
1~16

ALMI/ALMO PHONE

1. Indicators

2. Buttons

3. Clock ports, auxiliary


ports, and management ports

4. STM-1 ports

5. E1 (1-16) ports

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-5 Status explanation for indicators on the CSTA
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on


or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at


100 ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or


loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

SRV

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The clock is working properly.

On (red)

The clock source is lost or a clock


switchover occurs.

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


system.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

LOS1

LOS2

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

On (red)

The first STM-1 port on the line is


reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The first STM-1 port on the line is free


of R_LOS alarms.

On (red)

The second STM-1 port on the line is


reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The second STM-1 port on the line is free


of R_LOS alarms.

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports


Table 3-6 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port

Description

NMS/COM

Ethernet NM port/NM serial port

EXT

NE cascading port

CLK/TOD

External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),


port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet, or
wayside E1 port

F1/S1

Synchronous/Asynchronous data port

ALMI/ALMO

Alarm input/output port

PHONE

Orderwire phone port

Connector Type

RJ45

NOTE

l The external clock port, outdoor cabinet monitoring port, and wayside E1 port share one port physically.
This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/
asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding
functions at one time.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit one orderwire byte. This port, however,
can transmit 64 kbit/s synchronous data or transparently transmit one orderwire byte at one time.
l Time ports TOD are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and
are not used in this product version.

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-8 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-8 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-7 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port


Port

NMS/COM

Pin

Signal

Transmitting data (+)

Transmitting data (-)

Receiving data (+)

Grounding end of the NM serial port

Receive end of the NM serial port

Receiving data (-)

Not defined

Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the EXT port


Port

EXT

Pin

Signal

Transmitting data (+)

Transmitting data (-)

Receiving data (+)

Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8

Not defined

NOTE

The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-9 provides status explanation for these
indicators.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-9 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On

The link is working properly.

Off

The link is interrupted.

On or blinking

The port is transmitting or receiving


data.

Off

The port is not transmitting or


receiving data.

ACT (yellow)

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.

Figure 3-9 shows the two common incorrect connections.

MAJ
LOS1
LOS2

CRIT
MAJ
MIN

CSTA

STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV

Figure 3-9 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO

PHONE

E1
1~16

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO

PHONE

E1
1~16

MAJ
LOS1
LOS2

CRIT
MAJ
MIN

CSTA

STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV

LAN

CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

The clock port (CLK) and port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the CLK/TOD port
physically but use different pins of the CLK/TOD port. Table 3-10 provides details about the
pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port.
Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port
Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Working Mode
External Clock

Port for Monitoring an Outdoor


Cabinet

Signal input (-)

Not defined

Signal input (+)

Not defined

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

3 Boards

Working Mode

External Clock

Port for Monitoring an Outdoor


Cabinet

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal


input (-)
(RS-422 level)

Signal output (-)

Grounding end

Signal output (+)

Grounding end

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal


input (+)
(RS-422 level)

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal


output (-)
(RS-422 level)

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal


output (+)
(RS-422 level)

NOTE

The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD port functions as a clock port.

Table 3-11 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-11 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port

Pin

Signal

F1/S1

Transmitting asynchronous data signals

Grounding end

Receiving asynchronous data signals

Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

Grounding end

Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

Table 3-12 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port


Port

Pin

Signal

ALMI/
ALMO

The first external alarm input signal

Grounding end for the first alarm input signal

The second external alarm input signal

The third external alarm input signal

Grounding end for the third alarm input signal

Grounding end for the second alarm input signal

Alarm output signal (+)

Alarm output signal (-)

External alarms are also called housekeeping alarms or relay alarms. OptiX RTN 910 provides
3-input and 1-output external alarms.
Figure 3-10 shows an interface circuit for external alarm input. When the relay of the external
system is switched off, the IDU interface circuit detects a high-level signal. When the relay of
the external system is switched on, the IDU interface circuit detects a low-level signal. The board
generates corresponding alarms based on the level signals detected by the IDU interface circuit.
External alarm input mainly achieves access of the relay alarms generated by the environmental
alarm generator.
Figure 3-10 Interface circuit for external alarm input
External system

IDU
Circuit for external alarm input
+3.3 V/+5 V
Input level

Pull-up
resistance

Relay
Alarm
input

Figure 3-11 shows an interface circuit for external alarm output. When the external alarm output
conditions are met, the equipment switches on or off the relay depending on the conditions that
result in the alarm. External alarm output helps to provide equipment alarms to the centralized
alarming device.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-11 Interface circuit for external alarm output


IDU

Circuit for external alarm output

Relay

+
Alarm
output

Output control

Table 3-13 provides the pin assignments for the PHONE port.
Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the PHONE port
Port

Pin

Signal

PHONE

Not defined

2
3
4

RING

TIP

Not defined

7
8

Buttons
Table 3-14 Buttons

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Button

Name

Description

CF RCV

CF configuration restoration
button

After this button is pressed and held for


eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.

RST

Warm reset button

After this button is pressed, a warm


reset is performed on the board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Service Ports
Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSTA
Port

Description

Connector Type

STM-1 (1)

The first STM-1 port

STM-1 (2)

The second STM-1 port

l SFP optical module: LC


l SFP electrical module:
SAA straight/female

E1 (1-16)

The first to sixteenth E1


signal ports

Anea 96

SFP optical modules are used to provide STM-1 optical ports; one SFP optical module provides
one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-12, in which TX represents the transmit
port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-12 Ports of the SFP optical module

RX

TX

The E1 port uses the Anea 96 socket connector. Figure 3-13 shows the front view of an Anea
96 connector and Table 3-16 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-13 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

The first received E1


differential signal (+)

25

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The first received E1


differential signal (-)

26

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

The second received E1


differential signal (+)

27

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The second received E1


differential signal (-)

28

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The third received E1


differential signal (+)

29

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The third received E1


differential signal (-)

30

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (+)

31

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (-)

32

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The fifth received E1


differential signal (+)

33

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

10

The fifth received E1


differential signal (-)

34

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

11

The sixth received E1


differential signal (+)

35

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

12

The sixth received E1


differential signal (-)

36

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

13

The seventh received E1


differential signal (+)

37

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

14

The seventh received E1


differential signal (-)

38

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

15

The eighth received E1


differential signal (+)

39

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

16

The eighth received E1


differential signal (-)

40

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

17

The ninth received E1


differential signal (+)

41

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

18

The ninth received E1


differential signal (-)

42

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

19

The tenth received E1


differential signal (+)

43

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

20

The tenth received E1


differential signal (-)

44

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

21

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (+)

45

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

22

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (-)

46

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

23

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (+)

47

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

24

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (-)

48

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

49

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

73

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

50

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

74

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

51

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

75

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

52

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

76

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

53

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

77

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

54

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

78

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

55

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

79

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

56

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

80

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

3.3.6 DIP Switches and CF Card


This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable compact flash (CF) card.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for 8 seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and
timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations
are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and
the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software
packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-14 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

1 2 3 4

ON DIP

1. DIP switches

2. CF card

Table 3-17 Setting DIP switches


Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicates that the board works with the


watchdog enabled.

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

Indicates that the board works with the


watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.

Indicates the BIOS holdover state.

Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.

The value is reserved.

The value is reserved.

The value is reserved.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa


1

Erases data in the system parameter area.

Erases databases.

Erases NE software, including patches.

Erases databases and NE software, including


patches.

Erases all data in the file system.

Erases all the data except for the board


manufacturing information and basic BIOS.

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.3.7 Valid Slots


The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary
slots. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSTA, the function units are mapped into
specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the NMS.
Figure 3-15 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSTA)

According to the function units, the CSTA is mapped into the logical system control and
communication board (CSTA), logical auxiliary management board (AUX), and logical service
boards (SL1D and SP3S) on the NMS.
Figure 3-16 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSTA)

Slot 10 (AUX)

Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 8 (SL1D)

Slot 9 (SP3S)

3.3.8 Board Feature Code


The board feature code of the CSTA indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-18 Board feature code of the CSTA


Board Feature Code

Port Impedance (Ohm)

120

75

3.3.9 Types of SFP Modules


The STM-1 ports on the CSTA board support four types of SFP optical modules.
Table 3-19 Types of SFP modules
Part Number

Type

34060287

Ie-1

34060276

S-1.1

34060281

L-1.1

34060282

L-1.2

34100104

STM-1e

3.3.10 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.

Related References
E.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
E.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
E.10.2.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
E.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
E.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
E.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
E.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
E.10.5 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports

3.3.11 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability,
performance of SDH ports, E1 ports, clocks, and auxiliary ports, board mechanical behavior,
and board power consumption.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Cross-Connection Capability
The CSTA supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12,
VC-3, or VC-4 level.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance


The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 3-20 STM-1 optical interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

155520

Classification code

Ie-1

S-1.1

L-1.1

L-1.2

Fiber type

Multi-mode
fiber

Single-mode
fiber

Single-mode
fiber

Single-mode
fiber

Transmission distance
(km)

15

40

80

Operating wavelength
(nm)

1270 to 1380

1261 to 1360

1263 to 1360

1480 to 1580

Mean launched power


(dBm)

-19 to -14

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-30

-28

-34

-34

Minimum overload (dBm)

-14

-8

-10

-10

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

10

8.2

10

10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of
SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance


The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 3-21 STM-1 electrical interface performance

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

155520

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Code type

CMI

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm)

75

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-22 E1 interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

2048

Code pattern

HDB3

Impedance (ohm)

75

120

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

One symmetrical wire pair

Orderwire Interface Performance


Table 3-23 Orderwire interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type

Addressing call

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm)

600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN
equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the
orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Synchronous Data Interface Performance


Table 3-24 Synchronous data interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined


byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

64

Interface type

Codirectional

Interface characteristics

Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface


Table 3-25 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the


Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

19.2

Interface characteristics

Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance


Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item

Performance

External synchronization
source

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz


(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)

Frequency accuracy

Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in and pull-out ranges


Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Wayside Service Interface Performance


Table 3-27 Wayside service interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the


microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

2048

Impedance (ohm)

120

Interface characteristics

Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-28 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D)

20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm

Weight

1.08 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 13.6 W

3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
The CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC differ from each other with regard to the types and number of
service ports.

3.4.1 Version Description


The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.

3.4.2 Application
CSHA/CSHB/CSHC boards function as system control, switching, and timing boards on OptiX
RTN 910 NEs building Hybrid radio networks. In this scenario, these boards also receive and
transmit E1/STM-1/FE/GE services. The selection of CSHA, CSHB, or CSHC boards depends
on desired port types and port quantities.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-17 Application scenario of CSHA/CSHB/CSHC boards


IF
board

CSHA/
CSHB/
CSHC

IF
board

Hybrid radio network

E1/STM-1
Service
board

FE/GE
E1/STM-1
FE/GE

CSHA/
CSHB/
CSHC

IF
board

IF
board

CSHA/
CSHB/
CSHC

Service
board

E1/STM-1
FE/GE
E1/STM-1
FE/GE

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be E1 interface boards, STM-1 interface boards, or
Ethernet interface boards.
l CSHA/CSHB boards must work in conjunction with STM-1 interface boards for receiving and
transmitting STM-1 services.
l To transmit IEEE 1588v2 packets through Ethernet ports on system control, switching, and timing
boards, use CSHD/CSHE boards.

3.4.3 Functions and Features


The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division crossconnection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHA/
CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE service ports, PDH/SDH service ports, auxiliary ports, and
management ports.
Table 3-29 lists the functions and features that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports.
Table 3-29 Functions and features that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports
Function and Feature

Description
CSHA

Basic functions

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Switching
capability

CSHB

CSHC

Supports 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching function.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

3 Boards

Description
CSHA

Clock

CSHB

CSHC

Cross-connect
capacity

Supports full time division cross-connections


(equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4
level.

System control
and
communication

Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of


the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.

Clock
synchronization
at the physical
layer

Provides the system clock and frame headers for


service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
The traced clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Radio link clock
l Synchronous Ethernet clock

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN

IEEE 1588v2

Processes IEEE 1588v2 messages.

External clock
port

External time
port

Outband DCN

Supports a
maximum of
five DCCs.

Inband DCN

Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN


bandwidth is configurable.

MPLS/PWE3 functions

Supported

Supports a
maximum of
five DCCs.

Supported

Supports a
maximum of
seven DCCs.

Supported

For details, see Table 3-30.


QoS functions

Supported

Supported

Supported

For details, see Table 3-31.


Ethernet service functions

Supported

Supported

Supported

For details, see Table 3-32.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

SDH service functions

3 Boards

Description
CSHA

CSHB

CSHC

Not supported

Not supported

Supported

For details, see Table 3-33.


PDH service functions

Supported

Supported

Supported

For details, see Table 3-34.


Auxiliary ports
and
management
ports

OM

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Ethernet NM
port

NM serial port

NE cascading
port

Orderwire
phone port

Asynchronous
data port

Synchronous
data port

External alarm
port

Three inputs and one output

Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

In-service
FPGA loading

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than


19.2 kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with
RS-232.

The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its


specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.

The specifications of port comply with RS-485.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description
CSHA

CSHB

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

Board voltage
detection

Supported

Detection of
indicators on the
other boards

Supported

Pluggable CF
card

Supported

CSHC

The packet switching unit of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC works with its service interface unit or a
service board to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-30 provides details about these
functions.
Table 3-30 MPLS/PWE3 functions
Function and Feature

Description

MPLS tunnel

Setup mode

Static LSPs

VLAN subinterface

Supported

Protection

1:1 MPLS tunnel APS

OAM

Supports the following OAM functions:


l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1710 and ITU-T Y.1711
l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions

PWE3

TDM PWE3

Encapsulatio
n mode

Supports the following encapsulation modes:


l SAToP
l CESoPSN

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Packet
loading time

125 s to 5000 s

Jitter
compensatio
n buffering
time

375 s to 16000 s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature


ATM PWE3

Description
Mapping
mode

l ATM N-to-one VCC cell encapsulation


l ATM N-to-one VPC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VCC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VPC cell encapsulation

Transparentl Supported
y transmitted
ATM service

ETH PWE3

Maximum
number of
concatenated
cells

31

Encapsulatio
n mode

l Raw mode

Service type

l E-Line

l Tagged mode

l E-Aggr
Setup mode

Static PWs

Numbers of PWs

Supports a maximum of 1024 PWs.

Protection

1:1 PW APS

OAM

Supports the following OAM functions:


l VCCV
l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1710 and ITU-T Y.1711
l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
l Intelligent service fault diagnosis, that is,
one-click PWE3 service fault locating

MS-PW

Supported

Configurable bandwidth

Supported

The packet switching unit of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC works with its service processing unit or
a service board to implement QoS functions. Table 3-31 provides details about these functions.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-31 QoS functions


Function and
Feature

Description

DiffServ

Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service


classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by the packets.

Ethernet complex
traffic classification

Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs,


C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried
by packets.

CAR

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.

Shaping

Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic


flow.

Queue scheduling
policies

Supports the following queue scheduling policies:


l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR

The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC works with its packet switching
unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-32 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-32 Ethernet service functions
Function and Feature

Description
CSHA

Basic functions

Port
specifications

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

CSHB

CSHC

Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works


with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.
FE electrical
port:
10/100BASE-T
(X)

GE electrical
port (fixed):
10/100/1000BA
SE-T(X)

Not supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

FE/GE port:
SFP module

3 Boards

Description
CSHA

CSHB

CSHC

Not supported

Not supported

Provides two
ports by using
small formfactor pluggable
(SFP) modules
of any of the
following types:
l Dual-fiber
bidirectional
FE/GE
optical
module
l Colored
CWDM GE
optical
module
l Single-fiber
bidirectional
FE/GE
module
l 10/100/1000
BASE-T(X)
GE electrical
module

Port attributes

Working mode

l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l The FE optical ports support 100M full-duplex and
auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.

TAG attribute

l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet


port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Jumbo frame

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length


of 9600 bytes.

Traffic control
function

Supports the port-based traffic control function that


complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

3 Boards

Description
CSHA

Services

E-Line services

CSHB

CSHC

Supports the following types of E-Line services:


l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services based on port+QinQ

E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services:


l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

LAG

Inter-board
LAG

Supported

Intra-board
LAG

Supported

ERPS

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T


G.8032/Y.1344.

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the


CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

LPT

Supported

ETH-OAM

Ethernet service
OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM


function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.

Ethernet port
OAM

Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM


function.

Remote monitoring (RMON)

Supported

Clock

Clock source

Synchronous
Ethernet

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:

Synchronous
Ethernet

Synchronous
Ethernet (not
supported by the
SFP electrical
module)

l Protection based on clock source priorities


l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Receives and transmits IEEE 1588v2 messages at


Ethernet ports but not at SFP electrical ports.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

3 Boards

Description
CSHA

CSHB

CSHC

DCN

Inband DCN

Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

OAM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types:


l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm reset

Supported

Query of SFP
module
information

Not supported

Not supported

Supported

Table 3-33 provides details about the SDH service functions that the CSHC supports.
Table 3-33 SDH service functions that the CSHC supports
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical


signals.

Port specifications

l Supports SFP optical modules and SFP electrical


modules.
l Supports the optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and
L-1.2 types when using SFP optical modules. The
characteristics of all the optical ports comply with
ITU-T G.957.
l Supports 75-ohm STM-1 electrical ports when
using SFP electrical modules. The performance of
the electrical ports complies with ITU-T G.703.

Protection

Clock

Linear MSP

Supported

SNCP

Supported

Clock source

Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Outband DCN

Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is


composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

OM

Supports the following loopback types:

Loopback

l Outloops at optical/electrical ports


l Inloops at optical/electrical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops on VC-4 paths
Setting of the
on/off state of a
laser

Supported

ALS functiona

Supported

Detection and
query of SFP
optical module
information

Supported

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:


l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

Table 3-34 provides details about the PDH service functions that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
supports.
Table 3-34 PDH service functions that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports
Function and Feature

Description
CSHA

Basic functions

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

CSHB

CSHC

Receives and transmits E1 signals.

Port
specifications

75-ohm/120ohm E1 port

16

32

Clock

Clock source

Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the


first or fifth E1 signal.

Clock
protection

Supports clock protection based on clock source


priorities.

E1 retiming
function

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

58

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description
CSHA

OM

CSHB

CSHC

Loopback

Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

PRBS tests at E1
ports

Supported

3.4.4 Working Principle


The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC consists of the system control and communication unit, packet
switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
NOTE

In this section, the CSHC is used as an example to describe the working principle of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-18 Functional block diagram
Backplane

GE bus

Ethernet signal
access unit

FE/GE signal

STM-1 signal
processing unit

STM-1 signal

E1 signal
processing unit

E1 signal

GE bus

Packet
switching unit

Ethernet service board

VC-4
signal
VC-4
signal

VC-4 signal

Cross-connect
unit

TDM service board

Control bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
System control
and
communication
unit

NE cascading port

External alarm port


Orderwire phone port

Auxiliary interface
unit

Asynchronous/Synchrono
us data port

Monitoring signal
Port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet/Clock port

Clock unit

Clock signal received


from other boards
Clock signal provided to
other boards

Clock signal
received from
the service
units on the
board

Clock signal
provided to
the other units
on the board

Clock signal
received from
the service
units on the
board

External clock signal


Power supplied to the
other units on
the board

Power
supply
unit

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

System Control and Communication Unit


The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l

The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.

The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.

The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.

The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.

The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.

The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.

The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.

The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.

The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.

The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines

Packet Switching Unit


The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services
(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).
l

After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an
Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the
configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.

After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an Ethernet
board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and
communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and
communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the
Ethernet board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-19 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-19 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit

Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC

SinkTDM
service unit

Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

Ethernet Signal Access Unit


The Ethernet signal access unit transmits/receives FE/GE signals and works with the Layer 2
switching module to implement the Layer 2 switching function.
l

In the receive direction, after restructuring, decoding, and performing serial/parallel


conversion for electrical signals, the Ethernet signal access unit performs frame
delimitation and preamble processing, extracts Ethernet frames, and performs cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) and Ethernet performance measurement. If optical signals are
received, the Ethernet signal access unit performs O/E conversion before performing the
preceding operations.

In the transmit direction, after performing frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code
computation, and Ethernet performance measurement, the Ethernet signal access unit
performs serial/parallel conversion for signals, encodes the signals, and transmits the
signals to the Ethernet port. In the case of an optical port, after performing the preceding
operations, the Ethernet signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion before
transmitting signals through the optical port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

E1 Signal Processing Unit


The E1 signal processing unit allows access of, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical
signals and processes clock overheads. Signal processing on this unit is the same as that on the
SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

STM-1 Signal Processing Unit


The STM-1 signal processing unit allows access of STM-1 signals, extracts clock signals,
restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, and processes overheads and pointers. Signal
processing on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as that on the SL1D. For details, see
3.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.

Auxiliary Interface Unit


The auxiliary interface unit processes inputs and outputs of the orderwire phone port,
asynchronous data port, synchronous data port, and external alarm port. The port for monitoring
an outdoor cabinet and the clock/time port share one port.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.

3.4.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, service ports, management ports, auxiliary ports, buttons, and labels on the
front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

SRV

SYNC

CSHA

STAT

PROG

Figure 3-20 Front panel of the CSHA


CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO

PHONE

FE1

FE2

GE1

GE2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

E1
1~16

62

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

1. Indicators

2. Buttons

3. Clock ports, auxiliary


ports, and management ports

4. FE service ports

5. GE electrical service ports

6. E1 (1-16) ports

SRV

SYNC

CSHB

STAT

PROG

Figure 3-21 Front panel of the CSHB


CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO PHONE

FE1

FE2

GE1

GE2

E1
17~32

E1
1~16

1. Indicators

2. Buttons

3. Clock ports, auxiliary


ports, and management ports

4. FE service ports

5. GE electrical service ports

6. E1 (1-32) ports

CSHC

STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2

Figure 3-22 Front panel of the CSHC

E1
1~16

1 21 2
GE1 GE2STM-1
CF RCV
RST RSTNMS/COM
CF RCV

EXT
NE

CLK/TIME
CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO PHONE

FE1

FE2

E1(1~16)

STM-1
STM-1

GEETH

1. Indicators

2. Buttons

3. Clock ports, auxiliary


ports, and management ports

4. FE service ports

5. FE/GE optical/electrical
service ports (using SFP
modules)

6. STM-1 ports (using SFP


optical modules)

7. E1 (1-16) ports

Indicators
Table 3-35 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHA/CSHB

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on


or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at


100 ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or


loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

SRV

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The clock is working properly.

On (red)

The clock source is lost or a clock


switchover occurs.

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-36 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHC


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on


or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at


100 ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or


loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

SRV

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The clock is working properly.

On (red)

The clock source is lost or a clock


switchover occurs.

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK1

On (green)

The connection at a specific port is


working properly.

Off

The connection at a specific port is


interrupted.

On or blinking (yellow)

Data is being transmitted or received.

Off

No data is being transmitted or received.

On (green)

The port connection is normal.

Off

The port connection is interrupted.

On or blinking (yellow)

Data is being transmitted or received.

Off

No data is being transmitted or received.

On (red)

The first port on the line is reporting the


R_LOS alarm.

Off

The first port on the line is free of R_LOS


alarms.

On (red)

The second port on the line is reporting


the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The second port on the line is free of


R_LOS alarms.

ACT1

LINK2

ACT2

LOS1

LOS2

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports


Table 3-37 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Port

Description

NMS/COM

Ethernet NM port/NM serial port

EXT

NE cascading port

CLK/TOD

External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),


external time port, port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet, or wayside E1 port

F1/S1

Synchronous/Asynchronous data port

ALMI/ALMO

Alarm input/output port

PHONE

Orderwire phone port

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Connector Type

RJ45

66

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

l The external clock port, external time port, outdoor cabinet monitoring port, and wayside E1 port share
one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes,
and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of
the preceding functions at a time.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit one orderwire byte. This port, however,
can transmit 64 kbit/s synchronous data or transparently transmit one orderwire byte at one time.

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-23 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-23 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-38 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port


Port

NMS/COM

Pin

Signal

Transmitting data (+)

Transmitting data (-)

Receiving data (+)

Grounding end of the NM serial port

Receive end of the NM serial port

Receiving data (-)

Not defined

Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-39 Pin assignments for the EXT port


Port

EXT

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Pin

Signal

Transmitting data (+)

Transmitting data (-)

Receiving data (+)

Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8

Not defined

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-40 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-40 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On

The link is working properly.

Off

The link is interrupted.

On or blinking

The port is transmitting or receiving


data.

Off

The port is not transmitting or


receiving data.

ACT (yellow)

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.

Figure 3-24 shows the two common incorrect connections.

SRV

SYNC

CSHA

STAT

PROG

Figure 3-24 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO PHONE

FE1

FE2

GE1

GE2

E1
1~16

SYNC

SRV

CSHA

STAT

PROG

LAN

CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO PHONE

FE1

FE2

GE1

GE2

E1
1~16

The clock port (CLK), high-precision time port (TOD), and port for monitoring an outdoor
cabinet share the CLK/TOD port physically but use different pins of the CLK/TOD port. Table
3-41 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-41 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port


Pin

Working Mode
Extern
al
Clock

External
Time Input
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)

External
Time
Output

External
Time
Input

External
Time
Output

(1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)

(DCLS)

(DCLS)

Port for
Monitori
ng an
Outdoor
Cabinet

Signal
Not defined
input (-)

Not defined

Not
defined

Not
defined

Not
defined

Signal
input
(+)

Not defined

Not defined

Not
defined

Not
defined

Not
defined

Not
defined

1PPS signal
input (-)

1PPS signal
output (-)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

DCLS time
signal
input (-)

DCLS time
signal
output (-)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)

Signal
output
(-)

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Signal
output
(+)

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Not
defined

1PPS signal
input (+)

1PPS signal
output (+)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

DCLS time
signal
input (+)

DCLS time
signal
output (+)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
input (+)
(RS-422
level)

Not
defined

Time
information
input (-)

Time
information
output (-)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

Not
defined

Not
defined

Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

Working Mode
Extern
al
Clock

3 Boards

External
Time Input

External
Time
Output

External
Time
Input

External
Time
Output

(1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)

(DCLS)

(DCLS)

Time
information
input (+)

Time
information
output (+)

Not
defined

Not
defined

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

(1PPS +
Time
Information
)

Not
defined

Port for
Monitori
ng an
Outdoor
Cabinet

Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)

NOTE

The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD port functions as a clock port.

Table 3-42 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-42 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port

Pin

Signal

F1/S1

Transmitting asynchronous data signals

Grounding end

Receiving asynchronous data signals

Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

Grounding end

Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

Table 3-43 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-43 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port


Port

Pin

Signal

ALMI/
ALMO

The first external alarm input signal

Grounding end for the first alarm input signal

The second external alarm input signal

The third external alarm input signal

Grounding end for the third alarm input signal

Grounding end for the second alarm input signal

Alarm output signal (+)

Alarm output signal (-)

External alarms are also called housekeeping alarms or relay alarms. OptiX RTN 910 provides
3-input and 1-output external alarms.
Figure 3-25 shows an interface circuit for external alarm input. When the relay of the external
system is switched off, the IDU interface circuit detects a high-level signal. When the relay of
the external system is switched on, the IDU interface circuit detects a low-level signal. The board
generates corresponding alarms based on the level signals detected by the IDU interface circuit.
External alarm input mainly achieves access of the relay alarms generated by the environmental
alarm generator.
Figure 3-25 Interface circuit for external alarm input
External system

IDU
Circuit for external alarm input
+3.3 V/+5 V
Input level

Pull-up
resistance

Relay
Alarm
input

Figure 3-26 shows an interface circuit for external alarm output. When the external alarm output
conditions are met, the equipment switches on or off the relay depending on the conditions that
result in the alarm. External alarm output helps to provide equipment alarms to the centralized
alarming device.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-26 Interface circuit for external alarm output


IDU

Circuit for external alarm output

Relay

+
Alarm
output

Output control

Table 3-44 provides the pin assignments for the PHONE port.
Table 3-44 Pin assignments for the PHONE port
Port

Pin

Signal

PHONE

Not defined

2
3
4

RING

TIP

Not defined

7
8

Buttons
Table 3-45 Buttons

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Button

Name

Description

CF RCV

CF configuration restoration
button

After this button is pressed and held for


eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.

RST

Warm reset button

After this button is pressed, a warm


reset is performed on the board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Service Ports
Table 3-46 Description of service ports on the CSHA/CSHB
Port

Description

FE1

FE port

FE2
GE1

GE electrical port

Connector Type

RJ45

GE2
E1 (1-16)

The first to sixteenth E1 signal


ports

E1 (17-32)

The seventeenth to thirty-second


E1 signal ports a

Anea 96

NOTE

a. Only the CSHB provides 32 E1 signal ports. The CSHA provides only 16 E1 signal ports.

Table 3-47 Description of service ports on the CSHC


Port

Description

Connector Type

FE1

FE port

RJ45

FE/GE optical port or FE/GE


electrical port

LC (SFP optical module) or SFP


electrical module

STM-1(1)

The first STM-1 port

STM-1(2)

The second STM-1 port

l SFP optical module: LC


l SFP electrical module: SAA
straight/female

E1 (1-16)

The first to sixteenth E1 signals

FE2
GE1
GE2

Anea 96

NOTE

On the NMS, FE1 and FE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; GE1 and GE2 correspond to
PORT3 and PORT4 respectively.

When the GE SFP ports and STM-1 SFP ports on the CSHC function as optical ports, optical
modules are required.
l

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports, one SFP
optical module, like an STM-1 SFP optical module, provides one TX port and one RX port.
For details, see Figure 3-27, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents
the receive port. One optical fiber is connected to each port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide GE ports, one optical
module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and
transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.

Figure 3-27 Ports of an SFP optical module

RX

TX

The FE ports and GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes.
Table 3-48 and Table 3-49 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different
modes.
Table 3-48 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

Table 3-49 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

3 Boards

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same
as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.
The E1 port uses the Anea 96 socket connector. Figure 3-28 shows the front view of an Anea
96 connector and Table 3-50 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-28 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Table 3-50 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

The first received E1


differential signal (+)

25

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The first received E1


differential signal (-)

26

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

The second received E1


differential signal (+)

27

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The second received E1


differential signal (-)

28

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The third received E1


differential signal (+)

29

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The third received E1


differential signal (-)

30

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (+)

31

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (-)

32

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The fifth received E1


differential signal (+)

33

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

10

The fifth received E1


differential signal (-)

34

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

11

The sixth received E1


differential signal (+)

35

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

12

The sixth received E1


differential signal (-)

36

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

13

The seventh received E1


differential signal (+)

37

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

14

The seventh received E1


differential signal (-)

38

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

15

The eighth received E1


differential signal (+)

39

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

16

The eighth received E1


differential signal (-)

40

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

17

The ninth received E1


differential signal (+)

41

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

18

The ninth received E1


differential signal (-)

42

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

19

The tenth received E1


differential signal (+)

43

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

20

The tenth received E1


differential signal (-)

44

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

21

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (+)

45

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

22

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (-)

46

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

23

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (+)

47

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

24

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (-)

48

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

49

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

73

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

50

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

74

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

51

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

75

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

52

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

76

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

53

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

77

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

54

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

78

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

55

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

79

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

56

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

80

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

3.4.6 DIP Switches and CF Card


This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable compact flash (CF) card.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for 8 seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and
timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations
are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and
the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software
packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-29 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

1 2 3 4

ON DIP

1. DIP switches

2. CF card

Table 3-51 Setting DIP switches


Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicates that the board works with the


watchdog enabled.

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

Indicates that the board works with the


watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.

Indicates the BIOS holdover state.

Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.

The value is reserved.

The value is reserved.

The value is reserved.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa


1

Erases data in the system parameter area.

Erases databases.

Erases NE software, including patches.

Erases databases and NE software, including


patches.

Erases all data in the file system.

Erases all the data except for the board


manufacturing information and basic BIOS.

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.4.7 Valid Slots


The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of
two ordinary slots. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC, the
function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the
NMS.
Figure 3-30 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)

The CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are mapped into different logical boards on the NMS.
Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHA)

Slot 10 (AUX)

Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 7 (EM4T)

Slot 9 (SP3S)

Figure 3-32 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB
Slot 5
(PIU)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHB)

Slot 10 (AUX)

Slot 7 (EM4T)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Slot 9 (SP3D)

79

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 6
(FAN) Slot 1 (CSHC) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 7 (EM4F) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

3.4.8 Board Feature Code


The board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC indicates the E1 port impedance. The board
feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-52 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
Board Feature Code

Port Impedance (Ohm)

120

75

3.4.9 Types of SFP Modules


The FE/GE ports and STM-1 ports on the CSHC support multiple types of small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) modules.
Table 3-53 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports
Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance

Dual-fiber
bidirectional GE
module

34060286

1000Base-SX

850 nm, 0.5 km

34060473

1000Base-LX

1310 nm, 10 km

34060298

1000BASE-VX

1310 nm, 40 km

34060513

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

1550 nm, 40 km

34060360

1000BASE-ZX

1550 nm, 80 km

34060416

1000BASE-CWDM

1471 nm, 40 km

34060417

1491 nm, 40 km

34060418

1511 nm, 40 km

34060419

1531 nm, 40 km

34060420

1551 nm, 40 km

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Category

Part Number

Single-fiber
bidirectional GE
module

3 Boards

Type

Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance

34060421

1571 nm, 40 km

34060422

1591 nm, 40 km

34060423

1611 nm, 40 km

34060483

1471 nm, 80 km

34060481

1491 nm, 80 km

34060479

1511 nm, 80 km

34060482

1531 nm, 80 km

34060478

1551 nm, 80 km

34060476

1571 nm, 80 km

34060477

1591 nm, 80 km

34060480

1611 nm, 80 km

34060475

1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm;


receive: 1310 nm
10 km

34060470

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm;


receive: 1490 nm
10 km

34060540

1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm;


receive: 1310 nm
40 km

34060539

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm;


receive: 1490 nm
40 km

Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE
module

Single-fiber
bidirectional FE
module

34060287

100BASE-FX

1310 nm, 2 km

34060276

100BASE-LX

1310 nm, 15 km

34060281

100BASE-VX

1310 nm, 40 km

34060282

100BASE-ZX

1550 nm, 80 km

34060364

100BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1550 nm;


receive: 1310 nm
15 km

34060363

100BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm;


receive: 1550 nm
15 km

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance

Electrical
module

34100052

10/100/1000BASE-T
(X)

NOTE

For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-55-Table 3-61 in CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
Technical Specifications.

Table 3-54 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1 port supports
Part Number

Type

34060287

Ie-1

34060276

S-1.1

34060281

L-1.1

34060282

L-1.2

34100104

STM-1e

3.4.10 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Related References
E.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
E.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
E.10.2.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
E.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
E.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
E.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
E.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
E.10.4.5 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Basic Attributes
E.10.4.6 Parameter Description: External Time Port_BMC
E.10.4.7 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Cable Transmission Distance
E.10.5 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports
E.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
E.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
E.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
E.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

E.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes


E.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
E.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
E.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
E.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports
E.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

3.4.11 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, SDH optical ports, E1 ports, clocks, and
auxiliary ports, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Packet Switching Capacity


The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports a 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.

Cross-Connection Capability
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8
VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.

Ethernet Port Performance


Ethernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide the
specifications of FE/GE optical ports (supported only by the CSHC), GE electrical ports, and
FE electrical ports.
NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-55 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance


transmission)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

850

1310

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

0.5

10

Operating wavelength (nm)

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm)

-9 to -3

-9 to -3

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-17

-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

9.5

9.5

Table 3-56 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)


Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

1310

1550

1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

40

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

1270 to 1350

1480 to 1580

1500 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-2 to +5

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-23

-22

-22

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

-3

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

Table 3-57 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-CWDM (40
km)

1000BASE-CWDM (80
km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

l Channel 1: 1471

l Channel 1: 1471

l Channel 2: 1491

l Channel 2: 1491

l Channel 3: 1511

l Channel 3: 1511

l Channel 4: 1531

l Channel 4: 1531

l Channel 5: 1551

l Channel 5: 1551

l Channel 6: 1571

l Channel 6: 1571

l Channel 7: 1591

l Channel 7: 1591

l Channel 8: 1611

l Channel 8: 1611

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-CWDM (40
km)

1000BASE-CWDM (80
km)

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

Nominal wavelength 6.5

Nominal wavelength 6.5

Mean launched power (dBm)

0 to +5

0 to +5

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-19

-28

Minimum overload (dBm)

-9

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

8.2

8.2

Table 3-58 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)


Item

Performance
1000BASEBX-D (10
km)

1000BASEBX-U
(10km)

1000BASEBX-D (40
km)

1000BASEBX-U
(40km)

Tx: 1490

Tx: 1310

Tx: 1490

Tx: 1310

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1490

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1490

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Multi-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

10

10

40

40

Operating wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1480 to
1500

Tx: 1260 to
1360

Tx: 1260 to
1360

Tx: 1480 to
1500

Rx: 1260 to
1360

Rx: 1480 to
1500

Rx: 1480 to
1500

Rx: 1260 to
1360

Mean launched power (dBm)

-9 to -3

-9 to -3

-3 to +3

-3 to +3

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

-3

-3

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-59 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)


Item

Performance
100BASEFX (2 km)

100BASELX (15 km)

100BASEVX (40 km)

100BASEZX (80 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1310

1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

100

100

100

100

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

15

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

1270 to 1380

1261 to 1360

1263 to 1360

1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-19 to -14

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-30

-28

-34

-34

Minimum overload (dBm)

-14

-8

-10

-10

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

10

8.2

10

10.5

Table 3-60 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

100BASE-BX-D (15 km)

100BASE-BX-U (15 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1550

Tx: 1310

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

100

100

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

15

15

Operating wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1480 to 1580

Tx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-15 to -8

-15 to -8

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-32

-32

Minimum overload (dBm)

-8

-8

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

8.5

8.5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-61 GE electrical interface performance


Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)


MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type

RJ45

Table 3-62 FE electrical interface performance


Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)


MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type

RJ45

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance


The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 3-63 STM-1 optical interface performance

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

155520

Classification code

Ie-1

S-1.1

L-1.1

L-1.2

Fiber type

Multi-mode
fiber

Single-mode
fiber

Single-mode
fiber

Single-mode
fiber

Transmission distance
(km)

15

40

80

Operating wavelength
(nm)

1270 to 1380

1261 to 1360

1263 to 1360

1480 to 1580

Mean launched power


(dBm)

-19 to -14

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-30

-28

-34

-34

Minimum overload (dBm)

-14

-8

-10

-10

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

10

8.2

10

10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of
SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance


The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 3-64 STM-1 electrical interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

155520

Code type

CMI

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm)

75

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-65 E1 interface performance

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

2048

Code pattern

HDB3

Impedance (ohm)

75

120

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

One symmetrical wire pair

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Orderwire Interface Performance


Table 3-66 Orderwire interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type

Addressing call

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm)

600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN
equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the
orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance


Table 3-67 Synchronous data interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined


byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

64

Interface type

Codirectional

Interface characteristics

Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface


Table 3-68 Asynchronous data interface performance

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the


Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

19.2

Interface characteristics

Meets the RS-232 standard.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance


Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-69 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item

Performance

External synchronization
source

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz


(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)

Frequency accuracy

Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in and pull-out ranges


Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance


Table 3-70 Wayside service interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the


microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

2048

Impedance (ohm)

120

Interface characteristics

Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-71 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D)

20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm

Weight

CSHA: 1.11 kg
CSHB: 1.16 kg
CSHC: 1.13 kg

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the CSHA: < 18.0 W
Power consumption of the CSHB: < 22.7 W
Power consumption of the CSHC: < 19.6 W

3.5 CSHD/CSHE
The CSHD/CSHE is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board. The
difference between the CSHD and CSHE is that the GE ports on the CSHD support pluggable
SFP optical/electrical modules, while the GE ports on the CSHE are fixed electrical ports.

3.5.1 Version Description


The functional version of the CSHD/CSHE is SLA1.

3.5.2 Application
CSHD/CSHE boards function as system control, switching, and timing boards on OptiX RTN
910 NEs building Packet radio networks. In this scenario, these boards also receive and transmit
E1/FE/GE services. Use CSHE boards if fixed GE electrical ports are required (for example, to
achieve synchronous Ethernet or IEEE 1588v2 functionality). Otherwise, use CSHD boards if
possible.
Figure 3-34 Application scenario of CSHD/CSHE boards
IF
board

PW1

CSHD/
CSHE

IF
board

MPLS tunnel

...

PWn

Packet radio network

CES/ATM E1
FE/GE
CES/ATM E1

Service
board

CSHD/
CSHE

IF
board

FE/GE

IF
board

CSHD/
CSHE

Service
board

CES/ATM E1
FE/GE
CES/ATM E1
FE/GE

OptiX RTN 910

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Smart E1 processing boards or Ethernet interface
boards.
l Ethernet ports on CSHD/CSHE boards can carry MPLS tunnels, which allow CSHD/CSHE boards to
transmit MPLS/PWE3 services traversing radio networks and regional backhaul networks in end-toend mode.
l Like CSHA/CSHB/CSHC boards, CSHD/CSHE boards can function as system control, switching, and
timing boards on OptiX RTN NEs building Hybrid radio networks. If IEEE 1588v2 packets need to
be transmitted using Ethernet ports on system control, switching, and timing boards, CSHD/CSHE
boards must be installed.

3.5.3 Functions and Features


The CSHD/CSHE provides 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection,
system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHD/CSHE provides
FE/GE service ports, E1 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.
Table 3-72 lists the functions and features that the CSHD/CSHE supports.
Table 3-72 Functions and features that the CSHD/CSHE supports
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Switching
capability

Supports 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching function.

Cross-connect
capacity

Supports full time division cross-connections


(equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4
level.

System control
and
communication

Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of


the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.

Clock
synchronization
at the physical
layer

Provides the system clock and frame headers for


service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.

Clock

The traced clock source can be any of the following:


l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Radio link clock
l Synchronous Ethernet clock

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

DCN

3 Boards

Description

ACR

Supported

IEEE 1588v2

Processes IEEE 1588v2 messages.

External clock
port

External time
port

Outband DCN

Supports a maximum of five DCCs.

Inband DCN

Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN


bandwidth is configurable.

MPLS/PWE3 functions

Supported
See Table 3-73.

QoS functions

Supported
See Table 3-74.

Ethernet service functions

Supported
See Table 3-75.

E1 service functions

Supported
See Table 3-76.

Auxiliary ports
and
management
ports

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Ethernet NM
port

NM serial port

NE cascading
port

Orderwire
phone port

Asynchronous
data port

Synchronous
data port

External alarm
port

Three inputs and one output

The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than


19.2 kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with
RS-232.

The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its


specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

OM

3 Boards

Description

Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

In-service
FPGA loading

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

Board voltage
detection

Supported

Detection of
indicators on the
other boards

Supported

Pluggable CF
card

Supported

The specifications of port comply with RS-485.

The packet switching unit of the CSHD/CSHE works with its service interface unit or a service
board to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-73 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-73 MPLS/PWE3 functions
Function and Feature

Description

MPLS tunnel

Setup mode

Static LSPs

VLAN subinterface

Supported

Protection

1:1 MPLS tunnel APS

OAM

Supports the following OAM functions:


l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1710 and ITU-T Y.1711
l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature


PWE3

TDM PWE3

Description
Encapsulatio
n mode

Supports the following encapsulation modes:


l SAToP
l CESoPSN

ATM PWE3

Packet
loading time

125 s to 5000 s

Jitter
compensatio
n buffering
time

375 s to 16000 s

Mapping
mode

l ATM N-to-one VCC cell encapsulation


l ATM N-to-one VPC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VCC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VPC cell encapsulation

Transparentl Supported
y transmitted
ATM service

ETH PWE3

Maximum
number of
concatenated
cells

31

Encapsulatio
n mode

l Raw mode

Service type

l E-Line

l Tagged mode

l E-Aggr
Setup mode

Static PWs

Numbers of PWs

Supports a maximum of 1024 PWs.

Protection

1:1 PW APS

OAM

Supports the following OAM functions:


l VCCV
l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1710 and ITU-T Y.1711
l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
l Intelligent service fault diagnosis, that is,
one-click PWE3 service fault locating

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

MS-PW

Supported

Configurable bandwidth

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The packet switching unit of the CSHD/CSHE works with its service interface unit or a service
board to implement QoS functions. Table 3-74 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-74 QoS functions
Function and
Feature

Description

DiffServ

Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service


classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by the packets.

Ethernet complex
traffic classification

Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs,


C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried
by packets.

CAR

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.

Shaping

Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic


flow.

Queue scheduling
policies

Supports the following queue scheduling policies:


l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR

The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHD/CSHE works with its packet switching unit to
implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-75 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-75 Ethernet service functions
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works


with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.

Port
specifications

Fixed FE
electrical port

Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

FE/GE port:
SFP module
(CSHD)

Provides two ports by using SFP modules of any of the


following types:
l Dual-fiber bidirectional FE/GE optical module
l Colored CWDM GE optical module
l Single-fiber bidirectional FE/GE module
l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) GE electrical module

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

Port attributes

3 Boards

Description

Fixed FE/GE
electrical port
(CSHE)

Provides two fixed 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) electrical


ports.

Working mode

l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation.


l The FE optical ports support 100M full-duplex and
auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex,
100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and autonegotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation. (CSHD)

TAG attribute

l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet


port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.

Services

Jumbo frame

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length


of 9600 bytes.

Traffic control
function

Supports the port-based traffic control function that


complies with IEEE 802.3x.

E-Line services

Supports the following types of E-Line services:


l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs

E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services:


l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

LAG

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Inter-board
LAG

Supported

Intra-board
LAG

Supported

ERPS

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T


G.8032/Y.1344.

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the


CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

LPT

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

ETH OAM

Ethernet service
OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag OAM.

Ethernet port
OAM

Supports IEEE 802.3ah OAM.

RMON

l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation


monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.

Supported

Clock

Clock source

Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP


electrical module)

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2

Receives and transmits IEEE 1588v2 messages at


Ethernet ports but not at SFP electrical ports.

DCN

Inband DCN

Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

OAM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types:


l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm reset

Supported

Query of SFP
module
information

Supported

The E1 service interface unit of the CSHD/CSHE works with its packet switching unit to
implement E1 service functions. Table 3-76 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-76 E1 service functions
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports


flexible configuration of E1 service categories.

E1 service categories

Supports the following E1 service categories:


l Native E1
l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Port
specifications

16

75-ohm/120ohm E1 port

Fractional E1
Native E1

ATM/IMA

Supported
Transport mode

Transported in the TDM plane

Retiming

Supported

Maximum
number of ATM
services

64

Maximum
number of ATM
connections

256

ATM traffic
management

Supported

ATM
encapsulation
mode

Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:


l N-to-one VPC
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC

Maximum
number of
concatenated
ATM cells

31

ATM OAM

Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level),


including the following functions:
l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect
indication (RDI)
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test

CES

IMA protection

Supported

Maximum
number of
services

16

Encapsulation
mode

Supports the following encapsulation modes:


l CESoPSN
l SAToP

Service
category

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Point-to-point services

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

Clock

OM

3 Boards

Description

Compression of
vacant slots

Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)

Jitter buffering
time (us)

375-16000

Packet loading
time (us)

125-5000

CES ACR

Supported

Retiming

Supported

Clock source

Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the


first or fifth E1 signal.

Clock
protection

Supports clock protection based on clock source


priorities.

Loopback

Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Cold reset and


warm reset

Supported

PRBS tests at E1
ports

Supported

3.5.4 Working Principle


The CSHD/CSHE consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit,
cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-35 Functional block diagram of the CSHD/CSHE
Backplane

FE/GE signal

Packet
switching unit

Ethernet signal
access unit

GE bus

Service board

GE bus

E1 signal

E1 signal
processing unit
VC-4
signal

Cross-connect
unit

VC-4 signal

TDM service unit

Control bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
System control and
communication unit

NE cascading port
Asynchronous data port
Synchronous data port
External alarm port

Auxiliary
interface
unit

Orderwire phone port


Port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet/Clock
port

Monitoring signal
External clock signal
Power supplied to the
other units on the board

Clock unit

Clock signal
received from
the service
unit on the
board

Power
supply unit

Clock signal received


from other boards
Clock signal provided
to other boards

Clock signal
provided to
the other
units on the
board
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to other
boards
+12 V power supplied to fans

System Control and Communication Unit


The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l

The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.

The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.

The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.

The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.

The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.

The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.

The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.

The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.

The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines

Packet Switching Unit


The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services
(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).
l

After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an
Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the
configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.

After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an Ethernet
board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and
communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and
communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the
Ethernet board.

Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-36 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit

Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC

SinkTDM
service unit

Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

Ethernet Signal Access Unit


The Ethernet access unit receives/transmits FE/GE signals, and works with the Layer 2 switching
unit to provide Layer 2 switching functions. In addition, the Ethernet signal access unit receives
IEEE 1588v2 messages (not supported by SFP electrical modules), adds timestamps to the
messages, and sends the messages to the clock unit.
l

In the receive direction, after restructuring, decoding, and performing serial/parallel


conversion for electrical signals, the Ethernet signal access unit performs frame
delimitation and preamble processing, extracts Ethernet frames, and performs cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) and Ethernet performance measurement. If optical signals are
received, the Ethernet signal access unit performs O/E conversion before performing the
preceding operations.

In the transmit direction, after performing frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code
computation, and Ethernet performance measurement, the Ethernet signal access unit
performs serial/parallel conversion for signals, encodes the signals, and transmits the
signals to the Ethernet port. In the case of an optical port, after performing the preceding
operations, the Ethernet signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion before
transmitting signals through the optical port.

E1 Signal Processing Unit


The E1 signal processing unit transmits/receives and processes E1 electrical signals, and works
with the packet switching unit and cross-connect unit to transport various signals.
l

In the receive direction, the E1 signal processing unit performs the following functions:
Implements the functions of impedance matching, signal equalization, level conversion,
clock recovery, de-jitter, and decoding for received E1 signals.
If the received E1 signals need to be transmitted through the TDM plane in form of
native E1 signals, the E1 signal processing unit maps the E1 signals into VC-4s,
performs pointer processing, and sends the signals to the cross-connect unit for
grooming.
If the received E1 signals need to be transmitted through the packet switched plane in
form of packet services, the E1 signal processing unit performs PWE3 encapsulation
for a required service category such as ATM service, IMA service, and CES service,
and sends the encapsulated packets to the packet switching unit for grooming.

In the transmit direction, the E1 signal processing unit performs the following functions:
For the VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit, the E1 signal processing unit
implements the functions of clock processing, demapping, and overhead processing,
and extracts E1 signals.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

For the PWE3 packets from the packet switching unit, the E1 signal processing unit
implements the functions of protocol processing, PWE3 decapsulation, queue
scheduling, and other QoS processing, and sends out E1 signals.
For output E1 signals, the interface part of the E1 signal processing unit implements the
functions of encoding, de-jitter, pulse shaping, and line driving, and sends the signals
to an E1 port.

Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.
The clock unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages from the FE signal access unit and GE signal
access unit on the local board or from other Ethernet service boards, and performs protocol
processing to implement clock/time synchronization.

Auxiliary Interface Unit


The auxiliary interface unit processes inputs and outputs of the orderwire phone port,
asynchronous data port, synchronous data port, port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet, and
external alarm port. The port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet and the clock/time port share
one port.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.

3.5.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, service ports, management ports, auxiliary ports, buttons, and labels on the
front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

CSHD

STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2

Figure 3-37 Front panel of the CSHD

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

E1
1~16

TX RX
1 2
CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO TEL/ MON / TOD2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GE

104

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

CSHE

STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV

Figure 3-38 Front panel of the CSHE


16
1
CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO TEL/ MON / TOD2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

GE2

GE1

1. Indicators

2. Buttons

3. Clock ports, auxiliary


ports, and management ports

4. FE service ports

5.

6. E1 (1-16) ports

l CSHD: FE/GE optical/


electrical service ports
(using SFP modules)
l CSHE: fixed GE
electrical service port

Indicators
Table 3-77 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHD/CSHE
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on


or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at


100 ms intervals

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

The BOOTROM self-check fails during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or


loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

SRV

LINK1a

ACT1a

LINK2a

ACT2a

On (green)

The clock is working properly.

On (red)

The clock source is lost or a clock


switchover occurs.

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

On (green)

The connection at the GE1 port is


working properly.

Off

The connection at the GE1 port is


interrupted.

On or blinking (yellow)

Data is being transmitted or received at


the GE1 port.

Off

No data is being transmitted or received


at the GE1 port.

On (green)

The connection at the GE2 port is


working properly.

Off

The connection at the GE2 port is


interrupted.

On or blinking (yellow)

Data is being transmitted or received at


the GE2 port.

Off

No data is being transmitted or received


at the GE2 port.

NOTE

a: The LINK1, LINK2, ACT1, and ACT2 indicators are available only on the CSHD and indicate optical
port status.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports


Table 3-78 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port

Description

Connector Type

NMS/COM

Ethernet NM port/NM serial port

EXT

NE cascading port

CLK/TOD1

External clock port(2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),


external time port 1 or wayside E1 port

F1/S1

Synchronous/Asynchronous data port

ALMI/ALMO

Alarm input/output port

TEL/MON/
TOD2

Orderwire phone port, port for monitoring an


outdoor cabinet, or time port 2

RJ45

NOTE

l External clock port, external time port 1, and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can
also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data
overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit one orderwire byte. This port, however,
can transmit 64 kbit/s synchronous data or transparently transmit one orderwire byte at one time.
l Orderwire phone port, external time port 2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port
physically. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-39 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-39 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-79 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port


Port

NMS/COM

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Pin

Signal

Transmitting data (+)

Transmitting data (-)

Receiving data (+)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Port

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Grounding end of the NM serial port

Receive end of the NM serial port

Receiving data (-)

Not defined

Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-80 Pin assignments for the EXT port


Port

EXT

Pin

Signal

Transmitting data (+)

Transmitting data (-)

Receiving data (+)

Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8

Not defined

NOTE

The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-81 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-81 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On

The link is working properly.

Off

The link is interrupted.

On or blinking

The port is transmitting or receiving


data.

Off

The port is not transmitting or


receiving data.

ACT (yellow)

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Using the CSHD as an example, Figure 3-40 shows the two common incorrect connections.

CSHD

STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2

Figure 3-40 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

E1
1~16

TX RX
1 2
CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO TEL/ MON / TOD2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

GE

CSHD

STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2

LAN

E1
1~16

TX RX
1 2
CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO TEL/ MON / TOD2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

GE

The clock port (CLK) and the high-precision time port (TOD1) use different pins of the same
RJ45 connector. The pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port are provided in Table 3-82. The
CLK/TOD1 port can work only in one mode at one time and does not support two or more modes
at the same time.
Table 3-82 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin

Working Mode
External
Clock

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

External
Time
Input

External
Time
Output

(1PPS +
Time
Informati
on)

(1PPS +
Time
Information
)

External
Time Input
(DCLS)

External
Time
Output
(DCLS)

Signal input
(-)

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Signal input
(+)

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

1PPS signal
input (-)

1PPS signal
output (-)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

DCLS time
signal input
(-)

DCLS time
signal output
(-)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

Signal output
(-)

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Signal output
(+)

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

Working Mode
External
Clock

Not defined

Not defined

3 Boards

Not defined

External
Time
Input

External
Time
Output

(1PPS +
Time
Informati
on)

(1PPS +
Time
Information
)

1PPS signal
input (+)

1PPS signal
output (+)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

Time
information
input (-)

Time
information
output (-)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

Time
information
input (+)

Time
information
output (+)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

External
Time Input
(DCLS)

External
Time
Output
(DCLS)

DCLS time
signal input
(+)

DCLS time
signal output
(+)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

NOTE

The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.

Table 3-83 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-83 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Port

Pin

Signal

F1/S1

Transmitting asynchronous data signals

Grounding end

Receiving asynchronous data signals

Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

Grounding end

Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-84 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.
Table 3-84 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port
Port

Pin

Signal

ALMI/
ALMO

The first external alarm input signal

Grounding end for the first alarm input signal

The second external alarm input signal

The third external alarm input signal

Grounding end for the third alarm input signal

Grounding end for the second alarm input signal

Alarm output signal (+)

Alarm output signal (-)

External alarms are also called housekeeping alarms or relay alarms. OptiX RTN 910 provides
3-input and 1-output external alarms.
Figure 3-41 shows an interface circuit for external alarm input. When the relay of the external
system is switched off, the IDU interface circuit detects a high-level signal. When the relay of
the external system is switched on, the IDU interface circuit detects a low-level signal. The board
generates corresponding alarms based on the level signals detected by the IDU interface circuit.
External alarm input mainly achieves access of the relay alarms generated by the environmental
alarm generator.
Figure 3-41 Interface circuit for external alarm input
External system

IDU
Circuit for external alarm input
+3.3 V/+5 V
Input level

Pull-up
resistance

Relay
Alarm
input

Figure 3-42 shows an interface circuit for external alarm output. When the external alarm output
conditions are met, the equipment switches on or off the relay depending on the conditions that
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

result in the alarm. External alarm output helps to provide equipment alarms to the centralized
alarming device.
Figure 3-42 Interface circuit for external alarm output
IDU

Circuit for external alarm output

Relay

+
Alarm
output

Output control

The orderwire phone port, time port, and port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the TEL/
MON/TOD2 port physically. The pin assignments for the TEL/MON/TOD2 port are provided
in Table 3-85.
Table 3-85 Pin assignment of the TEL/MON/TOD2 port
Pin

Working Mode
PHONE

External
Time
Input

External
Time
Output

External
Time
Input

External
Time
Output

(1PPS +
Time
Informa
tion)

(1PPS +
Time
Informati
on)

(DCLS)

(DCLS)

Port for
Monitorin
g an
Outdoor
Cabinet

Not
defined

Not
defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not
defined

Not
defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not
defined

1PPS
signal
input (-)

1PPS signal
output (-)

DCLS time
signal input
(-)

DCLS time
signal
output (-)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal input
(-)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)
4

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

RING

Groundin
g end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

112

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

3 Boards

Working Mode
PHONE

External
Time
Input

External
Time
Output

External
Time
Input

External
Time
Output

(1PPS +
Time
Informa
tion)

(1PPS +
Time
Informati
on)

(DCLS)

(DCLS)

Port for
Monitorin
g an
Outdoor
Cabinet

TIP

Groundin
g end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Grounding
end

Not
defined

1PPS
signal
input (+)

1PPS signal
output (+)

DCLS time
signal input
(+)

DCLS time
signal
output (+)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal input
(+)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)

(RS-422
level)
7

Not
defined

Time
informati
on input
(-)
(RS-422
level)

Not
defined

Time
informati
on input
(+)
(RS-422
level)

Time
information
output (-)

Not defined

Not defined

(RS-422
level)

Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)

Time
information
output (+)

Not defined

Not defined

(RS-422
level)

Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)

Buttons
Table 3-86 Buttons

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Button

Name

Description

CF RCV

CF configuration restoration
button

After this button is pressed and held for


eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.

RST

Warm reset button

After this button is pressed, a warm


reset is performed on the board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Service Ports
Table 3-87 Description of the service ports on the CSHD/CSHE
Port

Description

Connector Type

FE1

FE port

RJ45

l CSHD: FE/GE optical/


electrical ports
l CSHE: GE electrical ports

l CSHD: LC SFP optical module


or SFP electrical module
l CSHE: RJ45

The first to sixteenth E1 signal


ports

Anea 96

FE2
FE3
FE4
GE1
GE2
E1 (1-16)

NOTE

On the NMS, FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT1 to PORT4 respectively; GE1 and GE2 correspond to
PORT5 and PORT6 respectively.

When the SFP ports on the CSHD function as optical ports, optical modules are required.
l

When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-43, in
which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber
is connected to each port.

When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical
module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and
transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.

Figure 3-43 Ports of an SFP optical module

TX

RX

The FE electrical ports and GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDIX modes. Table 3-88 and Table 3-89 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in
different modes.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-88 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

Table 3-89 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

3 Boards

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same
as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.
The E1 port uses the Anea 96 socket connector. Figure 3-44 shows the front view of an Anea
96 connector and Table 3-90 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-44 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Table 3-90 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

The first received E1


differential signal (+)

25

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The first received E1


differential signal (-)

26

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The second received E1


differential signal (+)

27

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The second received E1


differential signal (-)

28

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The third received E1


differential signal (+)

29

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The third received E1


differential signal (-)

30

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (+)

31

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (-)

32

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

The fifth received E1


differential signal (+)

33

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

10

The fifth received E1


differential signal (-)

34

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

11

The sixth received E1


differential signal (+)

35

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

12

The sixth received E1


differential signal (-)

36

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

13

The seventh received E1


differential signal (+)

37

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

14

The seventh received E1


differential signal (-)

38

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

15

The eighth received E1


differential signal (+)

39

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

16

The eighth received E1


differential signal (-)

40

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

17

The ninth received E1


differential signal (+)

41

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

18

The ninth received E1


differential signal (-)

42

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

19

The tenth received E1


differential signal (+)

43

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

20

The tenth received E1


differential signal (-)

44

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

21

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (+)

45

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

22

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (-)

46

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

23

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (+)

47

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

24

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (-)

48

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

49

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

73

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

50

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

74

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

51

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

75

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

52

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

76

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

53

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

77

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

54

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

78

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

55

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

79

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

56

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

80

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

3.5.6 DIP Switches and CF Card


This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable compact flash (CF) card.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for 8 seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and
timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations
are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and
the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software
packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-45 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

1 2 3 4

ON DIP

1. DIP switches

2. CF card

Table 3-91 Setting DIP switches


Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicates that the board works with the


watchdog enabled.

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

Indicates that the board works with the


watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.

Indicates the BIOS holdover state.

Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.

The value is reserved.

The value is reserved.

The value is reserved.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa


1

Erases data in the system parameter area.

Erases databases.

Erases NE software, including patches.

Erases databases and NE software, including


patches.

Erases all data in the file system.

Erases all the data except for the board


manufacturing information and basic BIOS.

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.5.7 Valid Slots


The CSHD/CSHE is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two
ordinary slots. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSHD, the function units are
mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the NMS.
Figure 3-46 Slot for the CSHD/CSHE in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHD/CSHE)

The CSHD/CSHE is mapped into different logical boards on the NMS.


Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHD
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHD)

Slot 10 (AUX)

Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 7 (EM6X)

Slot 9 (MP1)

Figure 3-48 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHE
Slot 5
(PIU)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHE)

Slot 10 (AUX)

Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 7 (EM6TB)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Slot 9 (MP1)

120

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.5.8 Board Feature Code


The board feature code of the CSHD/CSHE indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-92 Board feature code of the CSHD/CSHE
Board Feature Code

Port Impedance (Ohm)

75

120

3.5.9 Types of SFP Modules


The FE/GE SFP port on the CSHD supports multiple types of SFP modules.
Table 3-93 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports
Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance

Dual-fiber
bidirectional GE
module

34060286

1000Base-SX

850 nm, 0.5 km

34060473

1000Base-LX

1310 nm, 10 km

34060298

1000BASE-VX

1310 nm, 40 km

34060513

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

1550 nm, 40 km

34060360

1000BASE-ZX

1550 nm, 80 km

34060416

1000BASE-CWDM

1471 nm, 40 km

34060417

1491 nm, 40 km

34060418

1511 nm, 40 km

34060419

1531 nm, 40 km

34060420

1551 nm, 40 km

34060421

1571 nm, 40 km

34060422

1591 nm, 40 km

34060423

1611 nm, 40 km

34060483

1471 nm, 80 km

34060481

1491 nm, 80 km

34060479

1511 nm, 80 km

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Category

Part Number

Single-fiber
bidirectional GE
module

3 Boards

Type

Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance

34060482

1531 nm, 80 km

34060478

1551 nm, 80 km

34060476

1571 nm, 80 km

34060477

1591 nm, 80 km

34060480

1611 nm, 80 km

34060475

1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm;


receive: 1310 nm
10 km

34060470

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm;


receive: 1490 nm
10 km

34060540

1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm;


receive: 1310 nm
40 km

34060539

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm;


receive: 1490 nm
40 km

Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE
module

Single-fiber
bidirectional FE
module

34060287

100BASE-FX

1310 nm, 2 km

34060276

100BASE-LX

1310 nm, 15 km

34060281

100BASE-VX

1310 nm, 40 km

34060282

100BASE-ZX

1550 nm, 80 km

34060364

100BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1550 nm;


receive: 1310 nm
15 km

34060363

100BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm;


receive: 1550 nm
15 km

Electrical
module

34100052

10/100/1000BASE-T
(X)

NOTE

For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-94-Table 3-100 in 3.5.11 Technical
Specifications.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.5.10 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHD/CSHE.

Related References
E.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
E.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
E.10.2.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
E.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
E.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
E.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
E.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
E.10.4.5 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Basic Attributes
E.10.4.6 Parameter Description: External Time Port_BMC
E.10.4.7 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Cable Transmission Distance
E.10.5 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports
E.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
E.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
E.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
E.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
E.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
E.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
E.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
E.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
E.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports
E.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
E.5.1 Parameter Description: Working Modes of Ports
E.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
E.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

3.5.11 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, E1 ports, clocks, and auxiliary ports, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Packet Switching Capacity


The CSHD/CSHE supports a 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.

Cross-Connection Capability
The CSHD/CSHE supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at
the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Ethernet Port Performance


Ethernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide the
specifications of FE/GE optical ports (supported only by the CSHD), GE electrical ports, and
FE electrical ports.
NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-94 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance


transmission)
Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

850

1310

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

0.5

10

Operating wavelength (nm)

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm)

-9 to -3

-9 to -3

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-17

-20

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

9.5

9.5

Table 3-95 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

1310

1550

1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

40

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

1270 to 1350

1480 to 1580

1500 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-2 to +5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-23

-22

-22

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

-3

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

Table 3-96 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-CWDM (40
km)

1000BASE-CWDM (80
km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

l Channel 1: 1471

l Channel 1: 1471

l Channel 2: 1491

l Channel 2: 1491

l Channel 3: 1511

l Channel 3: 1511

l Channel 4: 1531

l Channel 4: 1531

l Channel 5: 1551

l Channel 5: 1551

l Channel 6: 1571

l Channel 6: 1571

l Channel 7: 1591

l Channel 7: 1591

l Channel 8: 1611

l Channel 8: 1611

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

Nominal wavelength 6.5

Nominal wavelength 6.5

Mean launched power (dBm)

0 to +5

0 to +5

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-19

-28

Minimum overload (dBm)

-9

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

8.2

8.2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-97 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)


Item

Performance
1000BASEBX-D (10
km)

1000BASEBX-U
(10km)

1000BASEBX-D (40
km)

1000BASEBX-U
(40km)

Tx: 1490

Tx: 1310

Tx: 1490

Tx: 1310

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1490

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1490

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Multi-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

10

10

40

40

Operating wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1480 to
1500

Tx: 1260 to
1360

Tx: 1260 to
1360

Tx: 1480 to
1500

Rx: 1260 to
1360

Rx: 1480 to
1500

Rx: 1480 to
1500

Rx: 1260 to
1360

Mean launched power (dBm)

-9 to -3

-9 to -3

-3 to +3

-3 to +3

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

-3

-3

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

Table 3-98 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)


Item

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Performance
100BASEFX (2 km)

100BASELX (15 km)

100BASEVX (40 km)

100BASEZX (80 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1310

1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

100

100

100

100

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

15

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

1270 to 1380

1261 to 1360

1263 to 1360

1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-19 to -14

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-30

-28

-34

-34

Minimum overload (dBm)

-14

-8

-10

-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Item

3 Boards

Performance

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

100BASEFX (2 km)

100BASELX (15 km)

100BASEVX (40 km)

100BASEZX (80 km)

10

8.2

10

10.5

Table 3-99 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)


Item

Performance

Classification code

100BASE-BX-D (15 km)

100BASE-BX-U (15 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1550

Tx: 1310

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

100

100

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

15

15

Operating wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1480 to 1580

Tx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-15 to -8

-15 to -8

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-32

-32

Minimum overload (dBm)

-8

-8

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

8.5

8.5

Table 3-100 GE electrical interface performance


Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)


MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

RJ45

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-101 FE electrical interface performance


Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)


MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type

RJ45

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-102 E1 interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

2048

Code pattern

HDB3

Impedance (ohm)

75

120

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

One symmetrical wire pair

Orderwire Interface Performance


Table 3-103 Orderwire interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type

Addressing call

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm)

600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN
equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the
orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Synchronous Data Interface Performance


Table 3-104 Synchronous data interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined


byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

64

Interface type

Codirectional

Interface characteristics

Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface


Table 3-105 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the


Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

19.2

Interface characteristics

Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance


Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-106 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item

Performance

External synchronization
source

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz


(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)

Frequency accuracy

Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in and pull-out ranges


Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-107 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance
CSHD

CSHE

Dimensions (H x W x
D)

20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm

Weight

1.00 kg

1.00 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the CSHD: < 32.2 W
Power consumption of the CSHE: < 31.7 W

3.6 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.6.1 Version Description


The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

3.6.2 Application
IF1 boards function as TDM IF boards to transmit TDM services on OptiX RTN 910 NEs
building TDM radio networks.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-49 Application scenario of IF1 boards

IF1

CSTA

IF1

TDM radio network

TDM
service
board

E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1

CSTA

IF1

IF1

CSTA

TDM
service
board

E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE

l IF1 boards transmit PDH radio services or 1xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
l If a TDM radio network needs to transmit a small number of FE/GE services, these services must be
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before being transmitted.
l Hybrid system control, switching, and timing boards can substitute for CSTA boards.
l TDM service boards shown in the preceding figure can be E1 interface boards or STM-1 interface
boards.

3.6.3 Functions and Features


The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Table 3-108 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports.
Table 3-108 Functions and features that the IF1 supports
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

l Receives and transmits one IF signal.


l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Radio type

TU/STM-1-based radio

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the IF1.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Protection

1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection

Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

SNCP

Supported

License

Supports control on the air interface capacity by using


the license file.

K byte pass-through

Supported

Clock

Clock source

Clock at the air interface

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported
only in SDH radio mode)
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
(supported only in SDH radio mode)

DCN

Inband DCN

Not supported

Outband DCN

l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is


composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less
than 16xE1.
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is
equal to or more than 16xE1.
l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types:


l Inloops at IF ports
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite ports

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

In-service
FPGA loading

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

Board power
detection

Supported

3.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-50 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane

SMODEM
unit

HSM signal bus

Paired board

ODU control signal


Service bus

Overhead bus

Control bus

Logic processing unit

Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing
unit

Combiner
Interface
unit

IF

Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit

System control and


communication unit
Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

+3.3 V power supplied to the other


units on the board

Power
supply
unit

Clock signal provided to the


other units on the board

Clock
unit

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

-48 V
+3.3 V

System clock signal

133

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-109 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Combiner interface
unit

Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals


and microwave service signals.

SMODEM unit

l Demodulates ODU control signals.


l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

IF processing unit

l Controls the level of service signals through the


automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation.


l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)

l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF


alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/
s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals
to the logic processing unit.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Step

3 Boards

Function Unit

Processing Flow

MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)

l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode


and generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports
the changes to the system control and communication
unit over the control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits
the overhead signals to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts TU pointers.
l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-110 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/
s overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)

l Sets higher order path overheads.


l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.

MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)

l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.

MODEM unit

l Performs FEC coding.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio


mode.

l Performs digital modulation.


4

IF processing unit

l Performs D/A conversion.


l Performs analog modulation.

SMODEM unit

Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the


system control and communication unit.

Combiner interface
unit

Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service


signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing


The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.

Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.6.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-51 Front panel of the IF1

PULL

IF1

WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT

IF1

ODU-PWR

IF

Indicators
Table 3-111 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working


properly.

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting


critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The ODU is reporting minor


alarms.

138

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

RMT

ACT

State

Meaning

Blinks on (yellow) and off at


300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is


reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free


of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
standby one.

Off

l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-112 Description of the Ports
Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding
Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.6.6 Valid Slots


The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-52 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3 (IF1)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 1

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-53 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS

Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 3 (IF1)

Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 1

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Table 3-113 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 3 > Slot 4

3.6.7 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.

Related References
E.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
E.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
E.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.6.8 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes


Table 3-114 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)
Service Capacity

Modulation Scheme

Channel Spacing (MHz)

4xE1

QPSK

4xE1

16QAM

3.5

8xE1

QPSK

14 (13.75)

8xE1

16QAM

16xE1

QPSK

28 (27.5)

16xE1

16QAM

14 (13.75)

22xE1

32QAM

14 (13.75)

26xE1

64QAM

14 (13.75)

35xE1

16QAM

28 (27.5)

44xE1

32QAM

28 (27.5)

53xE1

64QAM

28 (27.5)

STM-1

128QAM

28 (27.5)

NOTE

The channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 910 comply with ETSI standards. Channel spacings
3.5/7/14/28/40/56 MHz apply to most frequency bands; but channel spacings 3.5/7/13.75/27.5/40/55 MHz apply
to the 18 GHz frequency band.

IF Performance
Table 3-115 IF performance
Item

Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

140

Modulation scheme

ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

5.5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

Interface impedance (ohm)

10
50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem


Table 3-116 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item

Performance

Encoding mode

l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals


l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals

Adaptive timedomain equalizer for


baseband signals

Supported

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-117 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.72 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W

3.7 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.

3.7.1 Version Description


The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.7.2 Application
IFU2 boards apply to OptiX RTN 910 NEs to transmit native E1 services, native Ethernet
services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these services over Integrated IP
radio (native E1+Ethernet).
Figure 3-54 Application scenario of IFU2 boards

IFU2

CSHx

IFU2

IP radio network

E1

Service
board

FE/GE

CSHx

E1

IFU2

IFU2

FE/GE

Service
board
CSHx

E1
FE/GE
E1
FE/GE

OptiX RTN 910

CSHx: CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD/CSHE

NOTE

l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, E1 services can be native E1 services
or CES/ATM E1 services, and Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, E1 interface boards, or
Smart E1 processing boards.

3.7.3 Functions and Features


The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Table 3-118 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work
with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-118 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports


Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

l Receives and transmits one IF signal.


l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Radio type

Integrated IP radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.

Service categories

Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

AM

Supported

E1 priority

Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native


TDM services being E1 services

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.

Protection

License

Clock at the
physical layer

1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection

Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

SNCP for TDM


services

Supported

Air interface
capacity license

Supported

AM license

Supported

Clock source

Clock at the air interface

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2
clock

DCN

Time
synchronization

Supported

Frequency
synchronization

Not supported

Clock mode

Supports the OC mode and BC mode.

Inband DCN

Supported.
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature


Outband DCN

3 Boards

Description
Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC
bytes.

Ethernet service functions

See Table 3-119.

MPLS functions

See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided


in the section for the system control, switching, and
timing board.

PWE3 functions
OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types:


l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cold reset and


warm reset

Supported

In-service
FPGA loading

Supported

PRBS BER test


at IF ports

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

Board power
detection

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-119 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports


Function and Feature

Description

Ethernet
services

Supports the following types of E-Line services:

E-Line services

l E-Line services based on ports


l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services:


l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

ERPS

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T


G.8032/Y.1344.

OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM


function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.

LAG

Supported

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the


CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

QoS

See the description of QoS functions provided in the


section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.

RMON

Supported

3.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-55 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit

HSM signal bus


Paired board

ODU control signal

MODEM
unit

Overhead bus

Logic
processing
unit

Microwave frame
signal

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing
unit

Combiner
interface unit

IF

Service bus

Ethernet
processing
unit

Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit

GE bus

Control bus

Packet switching unit

System control and


communication unit
Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU


+3.3 V power supplied to the other
units on the board

Power
supply
unit

+3.3 V power supplied to the


monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V

Clock
unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-120 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Combiner interface
unit

Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals


and microwave service signals.

SMODEM unit

l Demodulates ODU control signals.


l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

IF processing unit

l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation.


l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP


radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC
bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead
signals to the logic processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/


DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-121 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.

l Processes GE signals.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP


radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4

MODEM unit

l Performs FEC coding.


l Performs digital modulation.

IF processing unit

l Performs D/A conversion.


l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.

SMODEM unit

Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the


system control and communication unit.

Combiner interface
unit

Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service


signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing


The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.7.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

IFU2

ODU-PWR

IF

STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT

IFU2

Figure 3-56 Front panel of the IFU2

Indicators
Table 3-122 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV

LINK

ODU
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting critical or major


alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

RMT

ACT

On (yellow)

The ODU is reporting minor alarms.

Blinks on (yellow)
and off at 300 ms
intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board


works as the active one.
l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board


works as the standby one.
l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

Ports
Table 3-123 Description of the Ports
Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding
Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.7.6 Valid Slots


The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-57 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3 (IFU2)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-58 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS

Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 3 (IFU2)

Slot 4 (IFU2)

Slot 1

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Table 3-124 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 3 > Slot 4

3.7.7 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.

Related References
E.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

E.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute


E.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
E.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
E.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
E.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
E.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes

3.7.8 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes


Table 3-125 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Channel Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)

QPSK

9 to 12

16QAM

10

20 to 24

32QAM

12

24 to 29

64QAM

15

31 to 37

128QAM

18

37 to 44

256QAM

21

43 to 51

14 (13.75)

QPSK

10

20 to 23

14 (13.75)

16QAM

20

41 to 48

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

50 to 59

14 (13.75)

64QAM

31

65 to 76

14 (13.75)

128QAM

37

77 to 90

14 (13.75)

256QAM

43

90 to 104

28 (27.5)

QPSK

20

41 to 48

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

82 to 97

28 (27.5)

32QAM

52

108 to 125

28 (27.5)

64QAM

64

130 to 150

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

160 to 180

28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

180 to 210

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)

56 (55)

QPSK

40

82 to 97

56 (55)

16QAM

75

165 to 190

56 (55)

32QAM

75

208 to 240

56 (55)

64QAM

75

260 to 310

56 (55)

128QAM

75

310 to 360

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 420

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.

IF Performance
Table 3-126 IF performance
Item

Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

140

Modulation scheme

ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

10

Interface impedance (ohm)

50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem


Table 3-127 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Encoding mode

LDPC encoding

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Adaptive timedomain equalizer for


baseband signals

Supported

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-128 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W
x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.79 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W

3.8 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.8.1 Version Description


The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

3.8.2 Application
IFX2 boards form XPIC workgroups to expand the capacity of an Integrated IP radio hop (native
E1+Ethernet) when transmitting native E1 services, native Ethernet services, native MPLS/
PWE3 services, or a combination of these services.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-59 Application scenario of IFX2 boards

E1
FE/GE

Service
board

E1

IFX2

IFX2

XPIC cable CSHx

CSHx XPIC cable

FE/GE

IFX2

IFX2

OptiX RTN 910

Service
board

E1
FE/GE
E1
FE/GE

CSHx: CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD/CSHE

NOTE

l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, E1 services can be native E1 services
or CES/ATM E1 services, and Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, E1 interface boards, or
Smart E1 processing boards.

3.8.3 Functions and Features


The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.
Table 3-129 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports.
Table 3-129 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

l Receives and transmits one IF signal.


l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Radio type

Integrated IP radio
NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.

Service categories

Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

AM
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

E1 priority

Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which


native TDM services are E1 services

XPIC

Supported

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.

Protection

License

Clock at the
physical layer

1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection

Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

SNCP for TDM


services

Supported

Air interface
capacity license

Supported

AM license

Supported

Clock source

Clock at an air interface

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2

DCN

Time
synchronization

Supported

Frequency
synchronization

Not supported

Clock mode

Supports the OC mode and BC mode.

Inband DCN

Supported.
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Outband DCN
Ethernet service features

See Table 3-130.

MPLS functions

See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that


the system control, switching, and timing board
supports.

PWE3 functions

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC


bytes.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

OM

Supports the following loopback types:

Loopback

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports


l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.

Cold reset and


warm reset

Supported

In-service
FPGA loading

Supported

PRBS BER test


at IF ports

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

Board voltage
detection

Supported

Table 3-130 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports


Function and Feature

Description

Ethernet
services

Supports the following types of E-Line services:

E-Line services

l E-Line services based on ports


l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature


E-LAN services

3 Boards

Description
Supports the following types of E-LAN services:
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

ERPS

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T


G.8032/Y.1344.

ETH-OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM


function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.

LAG

Supported

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the


CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

QoS

See the description of the QoS functions that the system


control, switching, and timing board supports.

RMON

Supported

3.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-60 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit

HSM signal bus


Paired board

Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF
processing
unit

Paired XPIC
board

Combiner
interface
unit

IF

Service bus

Overhead
bus

Logic
processing
unit

ODU control signal

Ethernet
processing
unit

GE bus

Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit

Packet switching unit

XPIC signal
Control bus

System control and


communication unit
Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU


+3.3 V power supplied to the
other units on the board

Power
supply
unit

+3.3 V power supplied to


the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V

Clock
unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-131 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Combiner interface
unit

Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals


and microwave service signals.

SMODEM unit

l Demodulates ODU control signals.


l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

IF processing unit

l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two


channels of signals.
Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF


signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP


radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM
bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode
and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to
the Ethernet processing unit.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/


DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-132 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.

l Processes GE signals.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP


radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4

MODEM unit

l Performs FEC coding.


l Performs digital modulation.

IF processing unit

l Performs D/A conversion.


l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

SMODEM unit

Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the


system control and communication unit.

Combiner interface
unit

Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service


signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Control Signal Processing


The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.8.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

I
X-IN

X-OUT

IFX2

ODU-PWR

IF

XPIC
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT

IFX2

Figure 3-61 Front panel of the IFX2

Indicators
Table 3-133 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

XPIC

On (green)

The XPIC input signal is


normal.

On (red)

The XPIC input signal is lost.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

STAT

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off

The XPIC function is


disabled.

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working


properly.

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting


critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

RMT

ACT

On (yellow)

The ODU is reporting minor


alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at


300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is


reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free


of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-134 Description of the ports
Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding
Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

X-IN

XPIC signal input


port

SMA

XPIC cable

X-OUT

XPIC signal output


port

SMA

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.8.6 Valid Slots


The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-62 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis


Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3 (IFX2)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-63 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2

Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 3 (IFX2)

Slot 4 (IFX2)

Slot 1

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Table 3-135 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 3 > Slot 4

NOTE

One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.

Related References
E.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
E.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
E.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
E.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
E.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
E.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
E.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
E.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.8.8 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes


Table 3-136 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Channel Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)

QPSK

9 to 11

16QAM

19 to 23

32QAM

11

24 to 29

64QAMa

14

31 to 36

14 (13.75)

QPSK

20 to 23

14 (13.75)

16QAM

19

40 to 47

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

50 to 59

14 (13.75)

64QAM

30

63 to 73

14 (13.75)

128QAMa

36

75 to 88

28 (27.5)

QPSK

19

41 to 48

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

84 to 97

28 (27.5)

32QAM

49

103 to 120

28 (27.5)

64QAM

63

130 to 150

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

160 to 180

28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

180 to 210

56 (55)

QPSK

39

83 to 97

56 (55)

16QAM

75

165 to 190

56 (55)

32QAM

75

210 to 245

56 (55)

64QAM

75

260 to 305

56 (55)

128QAM

75

310 to 360

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 410

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Channel Spacing
(MHz)

3 Boards

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)

NOTE
For the IFX2 board, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is
enabled or disabled.
When the channel spacing is 7 MHz or 14 MHz and the XPIC function is enabled, the IFX2 board only
supports the XMC-2 ODU.
a: When the XPIC function is enabled and the frequency band is 26 GHz to 42 GHz, the 7MHz/64QAM
and 14MHz/128QAM work modes are not supported.

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.

IF Performance
Table 3-137 IF performance
Item

Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

140

Modulation scheme

ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

10

Interface impedance (ohm)

50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem


Table 3-138 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Encoding mode

LDPC encoding

Adaptive timedomain equalizer for


baseband signals

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-139 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W
x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.80 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 33 W

3.9 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.9.1 Version Description


The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

3.9.2 Application
ISU2 boards function as SDH IF boards to transmit SDH radio services, or as Integrated IP
radio IF boards to transmit Integrated IP radio services (native E1+Ethernet or native STM-1
+Ethernet).

Functioning as SDH IF Boards


If applied to OptiX RTN 910 NEs building TDM radio networks, ISU2 boards function as largecapacity SDH IF boards to transmit TDM services.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-64 Application scenario of ISU2 boards (1)

ISU2

CSTA

ISU2

TDM radio network

TDM
service
board

E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1

CSTA

ISU2

ISU2

CSTA

TDM
service
board

E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE

l When working in SDH radio mode, ISU2 boards transmit 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
l If a TDM radio network needs to transmit a small number of FE/GE services, these services must be
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before being transmitted.
l Hybrid system control, switching, and timing boards can substitute for CSTA boards.

Functioning as Integrated IP radio IF Boards


ISU2 boards apply to OptiX RTN 910 NEs to transmit native E1 services, native STM-1 services,
native Ethernet services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these services over
Integrated IP radio.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-65 Application scenario of ISU2 boards (2)

ISU2

CSHx

ISU2

IP radio network

E1/STM-1

Service
board

FE/GE

CSHx

E1/STM-1

ISU2

ISU2

Service
board
CSHx

FE/GE

E1/STM-1
FE/GE
E1/STM-1
FE/GE

OptiX RTN 910

CSHx: CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD/CSHE

NOTE

l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, E1 services can be native E1 services
or CES/ATM E1 services, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services,
and STM-1 services must be native STM-1 services.
l ISU2 boards transmit native E1 services only when these boards work in native E1+Ethernet mode,
and transmit native STM-1 services only when these boards work in native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, STM-1 interface boards,
E1 interface boards, or Smart E1 processing boards.

3.9.3 Functions and Features


The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Table 3-140 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work
with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-140 Functions and features
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

l Receives and transmits one IF signal.


l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Radio type

l Integrated IP radio
l SDH radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.

Service categories in Integrated IP


radio mode

l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Service categories in SDH radio


mode

l STM-1

AM

Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode

Ethernet frame header compression

Supported

E1 priority

Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native


TDM services being E1 services

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.

Link-level
protection

1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection

Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

LAG protection
at air interfaces

Supported

TDM service protection

SNCP

K byte pass-through

Supported

PLA

Supported

Ethernet service functions

See Table 3-141.

MPLS functions

See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided


in the section for the system control, switching, and
timing board.

PWE3 functions
License

Clock at the
physical layer

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

l 2xSTM-1

Air interface
capacity license

Supported

AM license

Supported

Clock source

Clock at the air interface

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature


Clock
protection

3 Boards

Description
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2
clock

DCN

Time
synchronization

Supported

Frequency
synchronization

Not supported

Clock mode

Supports the OC mode and BC mode.

Inband DCN

Supported

Outband DCN

l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC


bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types:


l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cold reset and


warm reset

Supported

In-service
FPGA loading

Supported

PRBS BER test


at IF ports

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

Board power
detection

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-141 Ethernet service functions


Function and Feature

Description

Ethernet
services

Supports the following types of E-Line services:

E-Line services

l E-Line services based on ports


l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services:


l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

ERPS

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T


G.8032/Y.1344.

OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM


function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.

LAG

Supported

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the


CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

QoS

See the description of QoS functions provided in the


section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.

RMON

Supported

3.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
NOTE

The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service categories.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-66 Functional block diagram of the ISU2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit

HSM signal bus

Microwave
frame signal

Overhead bus

Ethernet
processing
unit

MUX/DEMUX unit

MODEM unit

IF processing
unit

Combiner
interface unit

IF

Service bus

Logic
processing
unit

ODU control signal

GE bus

Control bus

Paired board

Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit

Packet switching unit

System control and


communication unit
Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU


+3.3 V power supplied to
the other units on the board

Power
supply
unit

-48 V2
+3.3 V

+3.3 V power supplied to


the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board

-48 V1

Clock
unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-142 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Combiner interface
unit

Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals


and microwave service signals.

SMODEM unit

l Demodulates ODU control signals.


l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

IF processing unit

l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation.


l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers and generates


specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/


DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-143 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are


from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.

l Processes GE signals.

l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the


logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4

MODEM unit

l Performs FEC coding.


l Performs digital modulation.

IF processing unit

l Performs D/A conversion.


l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.

SMODEM unit

Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the


system control and communication unit.

Combiner interface
unit

Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service


signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing


The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.9.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

ISU2

ODU-PWR

IF

STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT

ISU2

Figure 3-67 Front panel of the ISU2

Indicators
Table 3-144 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

LINK

ODU

State

Meaning

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working


properly.

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting


critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

RMT

ACT

On (yellow)

The ODU is reporting minor


alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at


300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is


reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free


of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
standby one.

Off

l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-145 Description of the Ports

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding
Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.9.6 Valid Slots


The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-68 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3 (ISU2)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 1

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-69 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS

Slot 5
(PIU)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 1

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 3 (ISU2)

Slot 4 (ISU2)

Slot 10

Slot 7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Slot 8

Slot 9

180

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-146 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 3 > Slot 4

3.9.7 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.

Related References
E.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
E.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
E.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
E.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
E.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
E.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
E.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
E.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
E.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.9.8 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes


Table 3-147 SDH microwave work modes (ISU2 board)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Service Capacity

Modulation Scheme

Channel Spacing (MHz)

STM-1

128QAM

28 (27.5)

2xSTM-1

128QAM

56 (55)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-148 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)


Without
Compressio
n

With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)

3.5

QPSK

4 to 5

4 to 6

4 to 6

4 to 10

3.5

16QAM

9 to 11

9 to 13

9 to 13

9 to 20

QPSK

10 to 13

10 to 15

10 to 22

10 to 33

16QAM

10

20 to 26

20 to 30

20 to 44

20 to 66

32QAM

12

25 to 32

25 to 36

25 to 54

25 to 80

64QAM

15

31 to 40

31 to 47

31 to 67

31 to 100

128QAM

18

37 to 47

37 to 56

37 to 80

37 to 119

256QAM

20

41 to 53

41 to 62

41 to 90

42 to 134

14 (13.75)

QPSK

10

20 to 26

20 to 31

20 to 44

20 to 66

14 (13.75)

16QAM

20

41 to 52

41 to 61

41 to 89

41 to 132

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

51 to 65

51 to 77

51 to 110

51 to 164

14 (13.75)

64QAM

31

65 to 83

65 to 96

65 to 140

65 to 209

14 (13.75)

128QAM

37

76 to 97

76 to 113

76 to 165

76 to 245

14 (13.75)

256QAM

42

87 to 111

87 to 131

87 to 189

88 to 281

28 (27.5)

QPSK

20

41 to 52

41 to 62

41 to 89

41 to 132

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

28 (27.5)

32QAM

52

107 to 136

107 to 161

107 to 230

107 to 343

28 (27.5)

64QAM

64

131 to 168

131 to 198

131 to 283

132 to 424

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

QPSK

27

56 to 72

56 to 84

56 to 122

57 to 182

40

16QAM

55

114 to 145

114 to 172

114 to 247

114 to 366

40

32QAM

71

147 to 187

147 to 221

147 to 318

148 to 474

40

64QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

75

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

75

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel
Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)


Without
Compressio
n

With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)

56 (55)

QPSK

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

56 (55)

16QAM

75

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

56 (55)

32QAM

75

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

56 (55)

64QAM

75

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

75

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

Table 3-149 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)


Without
Compressio
n

With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)

28 (27.5)

128QAM

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

28 (27.5)

256QAM

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

64QAM

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

56 (55)

16QAM

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

56 (55)

32QAM

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

56 (55)

64QAM

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

56 (55)

256QAM

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92
bytes to 9600 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.

IF Performance
Table 3-150 IF performance
Item

Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

140

Modulation scheme

ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

10

Interface impedance (ohm)

50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem


Table 3-151 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Encoding mode

LDPC encoding

Adaptive timedomain equalizer for


baseband signals

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-152 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W
x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.60 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 22 W

3.10 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.

3.10.1 Version Description


The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.

3.10.2 Application
ISX2 boards form XPIC workgroups to expand the capacity of an SDH radio hop or Integrated
IP radio hop when transmitting native E1 services, native STM-1 services, native Ethernet
services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these services.

Functioning as SDH IF Boards


If applied to OptiX RTN 910 NEs building TDM radio networks, ISX2 boards function as largecapacity SDH IF boards to transmit TDM services.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-70 Application scenario of ISX2 boards (1)

STM-1

Service
board

ISX2

ISX2
CSTA XPIC cable

Service
board

STM-1

XPIC cable CSTA

STM-1

STM-1

ISX2

ISX2

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE

l When working in SDH radio mode, ISX2 boards transmit 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
l If a TDM radio network needs to transmit a small number of FE/GE services, these services must be
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before being transmitted.
l Hybrid system control, switching, and timing boards can substitute for CSTA boards. Only CSHC
boards independently receive and transmit STM-1 services. Therefore, when receiving and transmitting
STM-1 services, all Hybrid system control, switching, and timing boards except CSHC must work in
conjunction with TDM service boards.

Functioning as Integrated IP radio IF Boards


ISX2 boards apply to OptiX RTN 910 NEs to transmit native E1 services, native STM-1 services,
native Ethernet services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these services over
Integrated IP radio.
Figure 3-71 Application scenario of ISX2 boards (2)

E1/STM-1
FE/GE
E1/STM-1

Service
board

CSHx XPIC cable

Service
board

E1/STM-1
FE/GE

XPIC cable CSHx


E1/STM-1
ISX2

ISX2

FE/GE

FE/GE

OptiX RTN 910

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

ISX2

ISX2

CSHx: CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD/CSHE

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, E1 services can be native E1 services
or CES/ATM E1 services, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services,
and STM-1 services must be native STM-1 services.
l ISX2 boards transmit native E1 services only when they work in native E1+Ethernet mode, and transmit
native STM-1 services only when they work in native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Only CSHC boards independently receive and transmit STM-1 services. Therefore, when receiving
and transmitting STM-1 services, all system control, switching, and timing boards except CSHC must
work in conjunction with TDM service boards.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, STM-1 interface boards,
E1 interface boards, or Smart E1 processing boards.

3.10.3 Functions and Features


The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.
Table 3-153 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work
with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service
functions.
Table 3-153 Functions and features
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

l Receives and transmits one IF signal.


l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
l Integrated IP radio

Radio type

l SDH radio
NOTE
The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.

Service categories in Integrated IP


radio mode

l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Service categories in SDH radio


mode

l STM-1

AM

Supported only in integrated IP radio mode

Ethernet frame header compression

Supported

E1 priority

Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native


TDM services being E1 services

l 2xSTM-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

XPIC

Supported

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.

Link-level
protection

1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection

Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

LAG protection
at air interfaces

Supported

TDM service protection

SNCP

K byte pass-through

Supported

PLA

Supported

Ethernet service functions

See Table 3-154.

MPLS functions

See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided


in the section for the system control, switching, and
timing board.

PWE3 functions
License

Clock at the
physical layer

Air interface
capacity license

Supported

AM license

Supported

Clock source

Clock at the air interface

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2
clock

DCN

Time
synchronization

Supported

Frequency
synchronization

Not supported

Clock mode

Supports the OC mode and BC mode.

Inband DCN

Supported

Outband DCN

l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC


bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

OM

Supports the following loopback types:

Loopback

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports


l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
Cold reset and
warm reset

Supported

In-service
FPGA loading

Supported

PRBS BER test


at IF ports

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

Board power
detection

Supported

Table 3-154 Ethernet service functions


Function and Feature

Description

Ethernet
services

Supports the following types of E-Line services:

E-Line services

l E-Line services based on ports


l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services:


l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

ERPS

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T


G.8032/Y.1344.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM


function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.

LAG

Supported

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the


CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

QoS

See the description of QoS functions provided in the


section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.

RMON

Supported

3.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
NOTE

The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-72 Functional block diagram of the ISX2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit

HSM signal bus


Paired board

Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF
processing
unit

Paired XPIC
board

Combiner
interface
unit

IF

Service bus

Overhead
bus

Logic
processing
unit

ODU control signal

Ethernet
processing
unit

GE bus

Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit

Packet switching unit

XPIC signal
Control bus

System control and


communication unit
Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU


+3.3 V power supplied to the
other units on the board

Power
supply
unit

+3.3 V power supplied to


the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V

Clock
unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-155 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Combiner interface
unit

Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals


and microwave service signals.

SMODEM unit

l Demodulates ODU control signals.


l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

IF processing unit

l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two


channels of signals.
Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF


signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers and generates


specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Ethernet processing
unit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/


DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-156 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are


from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.

l Processes GE signals.

l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the


logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4

MODEM unit

l Performs FEC coding.


l Performs digital modulation.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

IF processing unit

l Performs D/A conversion.


l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.

SMODEM unit

Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the


system control and communication unit.

Combiner interface
unit

Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service


signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing


The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.10.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

I
X-IN

X-OUT

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ISX2

ODU-PWR

IF

XPIC
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT

ISX2

Figure 3-73 Front panel of the ISX2

194

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-157 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2
Indicator

State

Meaning

XPIC

On (green)

The XPIC input signal is


normal.

On (red)

The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off

The XPIC function is


disabled.

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.

STAT

l The board is not created.


l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working


properly.

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting


critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

RMT

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (yellow)

The ODU is reporting minor


alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at


300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is


reporting defects.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

ACT

State

Meaning

Off

The remote equipment is free


of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
standby one.

Off

l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-158 Description of the ports
Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding
Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

X-IN

XPIC signal input


port

SMA

XPIC cable

X-OUT

XPIC signal output


port

SMA

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.10.6 Valid Slots


The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-74 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3 (ISX2)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 1

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-75 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS

Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 3 (ISX2)

Slot 4 (ISX2)

Slot 1

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Table 3-159 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 3 > Slot 4

NOTE

One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the
same column.

3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.

Related References
E.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

E.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute


E.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
E.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
E.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
E.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
E.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
E.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
E.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.10.8 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes


Table 3-160 SDH microwave work modes (ISX2 board)
Service Capacity

Modulation Scheme

Channel Spacing (MHz)

STM-1

128QAM

28 (27.5)

2xSTM-1

128QAM

56 (55)

NOTE
For the ISX2 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether
the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.

Table 3-161 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC disabled)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)


Without
Compressio
n

With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)

QPSK

10 to 13

10 to 15

10 to 22

10 to 33

16QAM

10

20 to 26

20 to 30

20 to 44

20 to 66

32QAM

12

25 to 32

25 to 36

25 to 54

25 to 80

64QAM

15

31 to 40

31 to 47

31 to 67

31 to 100

128QAM

18

37 to 47

37 to 56

37 to 80

37 to 119

256QAM

20

41 to 53

41 to 62

41 to 90

42 to 134

14 (13.75)

QPSK

10

20 to 26

20 to 31

20 to 44

20 to 66

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel
Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)


Without
Compressio
n

With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)

14 (13.75)

16QAM

20

41 to 52

41 to 61

41 to 89

41 to 132

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

51 to 65

51 to 77

51 to 110

51 to 164

14 (13.75)

64QAM

31

65 to 83

65 to 96

65 to 140

65 to 209

14 (13.75)

128QAM

37

76 to 97

76 to 113

76 to 165

76 to 245

14 (13.75)

256QAM

42

87 to 111

87 to 131

87 to 189

88 to 281

28 (27.5)

QPSK

20

41 to 52

41 to 62

41 to 89

41 to 132

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

28 (27.5)

32QAM

52

107 to 136

107 to 161

107 to 230

107 to 343

28 (27.5)

64QAM

64

131 to 168

131 to 198

131 to 283

132 to 424

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

QPSK

27

56 to 72

56 to 84

56 to 122

57 to 182

40

16QAM

55

114 to 145

114 to 172

114 to 247

114 to 366

40

32QAM

71

147 to 187

147 to 221

147 to 318

148 to 474

40

64QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

75

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

75

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

56 (55)

QPSK

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

56 (55)

16QAM

75

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

56 (55)

32QAM

75

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

56 (55)

64QAM

75

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

75

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-162 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC enabled)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)


Without
Compressio
n

With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)

QPSK

10 to 13

10 to 15

10 to 22

10 to 33

16QAM

20 to 26

20 to 30

20 to 44

20 to 66

32QAM

11

25 to 32

25 to 36

25 to 54

25 to 80

64QAMa

14

31 to 40

31 to 47

31 to 67

31 to 100

14 (13.75)

QPSK

20 to 26

20 to 31

20 to 44

20 to 66

14 (13.75)

16QAM

19

41 to 52

41 to 61

41 to 89

41 to 132

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

51 to 65

51 to 77

51 to 110

51 to 164

14 (13.75)

64QAM

30

65 to 83

65 to 96

65 to 140

65 to 209

14 (13.75)

128QAMa

36

76 to 97

76 to 113

76 to 165

76 to 245

28 (27.5)

QPSK

20

41 to 52

41 to 62

41 to 89

41 to 132

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

28 (27.5)

32QAM

52

107 to 136

107 to 161

107 to 230

107 to 343

28 (27.5)

64QAM

64

131 to 168

131 to 198

131 to 283

132 to 424

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

QPSK

27

56 to 72

56 to 84

56 to 122

57 to 182

40

16QAM

55

114 to 145

114 to 172

114 to 247

114 to 366

40

32QAM

71

147 to 187

147 to 221

147 to 318

148 to 474

40

64QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

75

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

75

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

56 (55)

QPSK

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

56 (55)

16QAM

75

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

56 (55)

32QAM

75

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

56 (55)

64QAM

75

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

75

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel
Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)


Without
Compressio
n

With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

NOTE
When the channel spacing is 7 MHz or 14 MHz and the XPIC function is enabled, the ISX2 board only supports the XMC-2 ODU.
a: When the XPIC function is enabled and the frequency band is 26 GHz to 42 GHz, the 7MHz/64QAM and 14MHz/128QAM
work modes are not supported.

Table 3-163 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)

Modulation
Scheme

Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)


Without
Compressio
n

With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)

With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)

28 (27.5)

128QAM

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

28 (27.5)

256QAM

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

64QAM

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

56 (55)

16QAM

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

56 (55)

32QAM

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

56 (55)

64QAM

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

56 (55)

256QAM

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

NOTE
For the ISX2 board in STM-1 + Ethernet service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC
function is enabled or disabled.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92
bytes to 9600 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.

IF Performance
Table 3-164 IF performance
Item

Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

140

Modulation scheme

ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

10

Interface impedance (ohm)

50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem


Table 3-165 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Encoding mode

LDPC encoding

Adaptive timedomain equalizer for


baseband signals

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-166 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W
x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.60 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W

3.11 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE
electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/
EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed
electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore
can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the
EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
NOTE

EM6TA/EM6FA boards have the same functions as EM6T/EM6F boards. The only difference is that
EM6TA/EM6FA boards reserve hardware resources for the IEEE 1588v2 function.

3.11.1 Version Description


The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is SL91.

3.11.2 Application
EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards receive and transmit Ethernet services or carry MPLS
tunnels. The selection of EM6F, EM6FA, EM6T, or EM6TA boards depends on desired port
types.
NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 910, configure EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards only when Ethernet ports on
system control, switching, and timing boards cannot meet customers' requirements.

Receiving and Transmitting Ethernet Services


EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards apply to OptiX RTN 910 NEs to receive and transmit
FE/GE services over Integrated IP radio. The FE/GE services come from customer premises or
Layer 2 networks.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-76 Application scenario of EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards (1)

IP radio network

FE/GE

EM6x

OptiX RTN 910

CSHx

IF
board

CSHx: CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD/CSHE

IF
board

CSHx

EM6x

FE/GE

EM6x: EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet
services or ETH PWE3 services.

Carrying MPLS Tunnels


EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards carry MPLS tunnels when required, allowing MPLS/
PWE3 services traversing radio networks and regional backhaul networks to be transmitted in
end-to-end mode.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-77 Application scenario of EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards (2)


IF
board

PW1

CSHD/
CSHE

EM6x

FE/GE

MPLS tunnel

...

PWn

Packet radio network

Regional backhaul network

CES/ATM E1
FE/GE

Service
board

CES/ATM E1

CSHD/
CSHE

IF
board

FE/GE

EM6x

CSHD/
CSHE

Service
board

FE/GE

CES/ATM E1
FE/GE
CES/ATM E1
FE/GE

OptiX RTN 910

EM6x: EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l If required, create two MPLS tunnels on both the packet radio network and regional backhaul network
so PWE3 services are transmitted on MS-PWs in end-to-end mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Smart E1 processing boards or Ethernet interface
boards.

3.11.3 Functions and Features


The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE
signals and two GE signals. The GE port on the EM6F/EM6FA can receive/transmit 2xFE optical
signals using FE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical modules.
Table 3-167 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA supports.
The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system
control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-167 Functions and features
Function and Feature

Description
EM6T/EM6TA

Basic functions

Port
specifications
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

EM6F/EM6FA

Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works


with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.
FE electrical
port

Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
205

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

GE port

3 Boards

Description
EM6T/EM6TA

EM6F/EM6FA

Provides two
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
ports (fixed).

Provides two GE ports by


using SFP modules of any
of the following types:
l Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
optical module
l Colored CWDM GE
optical module
l Single-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
module
l 10/100/1000BASE-T
(X) GE electrical
module

Backplane bus bandwidth

1 Gbit/s

Port attributes

l The FE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards


support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and autonegotiation.

Working mode

1 Gbit/s

l The FE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards


support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards
support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex,
and auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards
support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex,
1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The FE optical ports on EM6F/EM6FA boards
support 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes

l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,


or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Jumbo frame

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length


of 9600 bytes.

Traffic control
function

Supports the port-based traffic control function that


complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

3 Boards

Description
EM6T/EM6TA

Services

E-Line services

EM6F/EM6FA

Supports the following types of E-Line services:


l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services based on port+QinQ

E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services:


l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

LAG

Inter-board
LAG

Supported

Supported

Intra-board
LAG

Supported

Supported

ERPS

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T


G.8032/Y.1344.

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the


CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

LPT

Supported

QoS

Supported

DiffServ

Supports simple traffic classification by specifying


PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried
by the packets.

Complex traffic
classification

Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based


on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, SVLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values
carried by packets.

CAR

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.

Shaping

Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized


queue, or traffic flow.

Queue
scheduling
policies

Supports the following queue scheduling policies:


l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

3 Boards

Description
EM6T/EM6TA

ETH OAM

Ethernet service
OAM

EM6F/EM6FA

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM


function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.

Ethernet port
OAM
RMON
Clock

Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM


function.
Supported

Supported

Clock source

Synchronous Ethernet

Synchronous Ethernet
(not supported by the SFP
electrical module)

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN

Inband DCN

Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types:


l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

Supported

Board voltage
detection

Supported

Supported

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

Supported

Query of SFP
module
information

Not supported

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T/EM6TA, and it serves as an
example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA.

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-78 Functional block diagram
Backplane
GE signal

GE signal
GE signal
access unit

Control signal
Ethernet
processing
unit

FE signal

FE signal
access unit

Ethernet
signal

Logic
processing
unit

Ethernet
signal
Packet switching unit

Control signal
FE signal
Control bus of the board

Logic
control unit

Control bus

+3.3 V power supplied to the


board

Power
supply unit

-48 V1
-48 V2

+3.3 V power supplied to some I/O


circuits on the board
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board

System control and


communication unit

+3.3 V
Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-168 Signal processing in the receive direction
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit

l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals.


l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for GE/FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement
for frame signals.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Ethernet processing
unit

l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data


frames.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing
unit.

Logic processing
unit

Transmits Ethernet data frames to the packet switching


unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-169 Signal processing in the transmit direction
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing unit

l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet


switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.


l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports
based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data
frames.

GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit

l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC


code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/
FE signals through Ethernet ports.

Control Signal Processing


The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the
control bus on the board.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands
from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board
through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and
the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit
also through the logic control unit.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and then supplies the +3.3 V power
to some I/O circuits on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.11.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

STAT
PROG
SRV

EM6T

Figure 3-79 Front panel of the EM6T

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

STAT
PROG
SRV

EM6TA

Figure 3-80 Front panel of the EM6TA

GE1

GE2

EM6F

STAT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
LINK2

Figure 3-81 Front panel of the EM6F


CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

STAT
PROG
SRV
L/A1
L/A2

EM6FA

Figure 3-82 Front panel of the EM6FA


CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

GE1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-170 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV

PROG

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on or


being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100


ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the


power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or loading


upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

LINK1a

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The GE1 port is connected correctly and is


not receiving or transmitting data.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

LINK2a

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Blinking (green)

The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE1 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

On (green)

The GE2 port is connected correctly and is


not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (green)

The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE2 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.

Table 3-171 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV

PROG

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on or


being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100


ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the


power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red)

The memory self-check fails or loading


upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.

L/A1a

L/A2a

On (green)

The GE1 port is connected correctly and is


not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow)

The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE1 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

On (green)

The GE2 port is connected correctly and is


not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow)

The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE2 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

NOTE

a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.

Ports
Table 3-172 Description of the ports on the EM6T/EM6TA
Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding
Cable

GE1

GE service port (fixed


electrical port)

RJ45

5.9 Network Cable

GE2
FE1
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

FE service port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Port

Description

3 Boards

Connector Type

Corresponding
Cable

FE2
FE3
FE4

Table 3-173 Description of the ports on the EM6F/EM6FA


Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding
Cable

GE1

GE service port (using SFP


modules)

RJ45 SFP electrical


module/LC SFP optical
module

5.9 Network Cable/5.5


Fiber Jumper

FE service port

RJ45

5.9 Network Cable

GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4

NOTE

On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to
PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.

The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA complies with


the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T/
EM6TA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service
ports on the EM6F/EM6FA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP
electrical modules are used. All service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-174 and Table 3-175. For the front
view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-83.
Figure 3-83 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-174 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

Table 3-175 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

3 Boards

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-176.
Table 3-176 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On

The link is working properly.

Off

The link is interrupted.

On or blinking

The port is transmitting or receiving


data.

Off

The port is not transmitting or


receiving data.

ACT (yellow)

When the SFP ports on the EM6F/EM6FA function as optical ports, optical modules are required.
l

When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-84, in
which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber
is connected to each port.

When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical
module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and
transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.

Figure 3-84 Ports of an SFP optical module

TX

RX

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F/EM6FA.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.11.6 Valid Slots


The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the
EM6T/EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-85 Slots for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6 Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)


(FAN)
Slot 1

Figure 3-86 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA on the NMS


Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6 Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)


(FAN)
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9

Table 3-177 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.11.7 Types of SFP Modules


The FE/GE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports on the EM6F/EM6FA support multiple
types of SFP modules.
Table 3-178 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports
Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance

Dual-fiber
bidirectional GE
module

34060286

1000Base-SX

850 nm, 0.5 km

34060473

1000Base-LX

1310 nm, 10 km

34060298

1000BASE-VX

1310 nm, 40 km

34060513

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

1550 nm, 40 km

34060360

1000BASE-ZX

1550 nm, 80 km

34060416

1000BASE-CWDM

1471 nm, 40 km

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Category

Part Number

Single-fiber
bidirectional GE
module

3 Boards

Type

Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance

34060417

1491 nm, 40 km

34060418

1511 nm, 40 km

34060419

1531 nm, 40 km

34060420

1551 nm, 40 km

34060421

1571 nm, 40 km

34060422

1591 nm, 40 km

34060423

1611 nm, 40 km

34060483

1471 nm, 80 km

34060481

1491 nm, 80 km

34060479

1511 nm, 80 km

34060482

1531 nm, 80 km

34060478

1551 nm, 80 km

34060476

1571 nm, 80 km

34060477

1591 nm, 80 km

34060480

1611 nm, 80 km

34060475

1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm;


receive: 1310 nm
10 km

34060470

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm;


receive: 1490 nm
10 km

34060540

1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm;


receive: 1310 nm
40 km

34060539

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm;


receive: 1490 nm
40 km

Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE
module

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

34060287

100BASE-FX

1310 nm, 2 km

34060276

100BASE-LX

1310 nm, 15 km

34060281

100BASE-VX

1310 nm, 40 km

34060282

100BASE-ZX

1550 nm, 80 km

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance

Single-fiber
bidirectional FE
module

34060364

100BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1550 nm;


receive: 1310 nm
15 km

34060363

100BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm;


receive: 1550 nm
15 km

Electrical
module

34100052

10/100/1000BASE-T
(X)

NOTE

For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-180-Table 3-185 in 3.11.9 Technical
Specifications.

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EM6F boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code. The bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA does not contain a board feature code.
Table 3-179 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code

Module Type

Part Number of the


Module

01

1000BASE-SX

34060286

02

1000BASE-LX

34060473

03

10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

34100052

10

100BASE-FX

34060287

11

100BASE-LX

34060276

NOTE

If the board feature code in the bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA is empty, no SFP module is installed on the
EM6T/EM6TA.

3.11.8 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA.

Related References
E.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
E.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

E.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes


E.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
E.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.11.9 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of FE/GE Optical Ports


The FE/GE optical ports on the EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the FE/GE optical ports.
NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-180 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance


transmission)
Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

850

1310

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

0.5

10

Operating wavelength (nm)

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm)

-9 to -3

-9 to -3

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-17

-20

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

9.5

9.5

Table 3-181 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

1310

1550

1550

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

40

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

1270 to 1350

1480 to 1580

1500 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-2 to +5

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-23

-22

-22

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

-3

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

Table 3-182 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-CWDM (40
km)

1000BASE-CWDM (80
km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

l Channel 1: 1471

l Channel 1: 1471

l Channel 2: 1491

l Channel 2: 1491

l Channel 3: 1511

l Channel 3: 1511

l Channel 4: 1531

l Channel 4: 1531

l Channel 5: 1551

l Channel 5: 1551

l Channel 6: 1571

l Channel 6: 1571

l Channel 7: 1591

l Channel 7: 1591

l Channel 8: 1611

l Channel 8: 1611

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

Nominal wavelength 6.5

Nominal wavelength 6.5

Mean launched power (dBm)

0 to +5

0 to +5

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-19

-28

Minimum overload (dBm)

-9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-CWDM (40
km)

1000BASE-CWDM (80
km)

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

8.2

8.2

Table 3-183 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)


Item

Performance
1000BASEBX-D (10
km)

1000BASEBX-U
(10km)

1000BASEBX-D (40
km)

1000BASEBX-U
(40km)

Tx: 1490

Tx: 1310

Tx: 1490

Tx: 1310

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1490

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1490

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Multi-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

10

10

40

40

Operating wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1480 to
1500

Tx: 1260 to
1360

Tx: 1260 to
1360

Tx: 1480 to
1500

Rx: 1260 to
1360

Rx: 1480 to
1500

Rx: 1480 to
1500

Rx: 1260 to
1360

Mean launched power (dBm)

-9 to -3

-9 to -3

-3 to +3

-3 to +3

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

-3

-3

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

Table 3-184 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)


Item

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Performance
100BASEFX (2 km)

100BASELX (15 km)

100BASEVX (40 km)

100BASEZX (80 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1310

1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

100

100

100

100

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Item

3 Boards

Performance
100BASEFX (2 km)

100BASELX (15 km)

100BASEVX (40 km)

100BASEZX (80 km)

Transmission distance (km)

15

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

1270 to 1380

1261 to 1360

1263 to 1360

1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-19 to -14

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-30

-28

-34

-34

Minimum overload (dBm)

-14

-8

-10

-10

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

10

8.2

10

10.5

Table 3-185 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)


Item

Performance

Classification code

100BASE-BX-D (15 km)

100BASE-BX-U (15 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1550

Tx: 1310

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

100

100

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

15

15

Operating wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1480 to 1580

Tx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-15 to -8

-15 to -8

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-32

-32

Minimum overload (dBm)

-8

-8

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

8.5

8.5

Performance of GE Electrical Ports


The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-186 GE electrical interface performance


Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)


MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type

RJ45

Performance of FE Electrical Ports


The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-187 FE electrical interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)


MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type

RJ45

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-188 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance
EM6T

EM6TA

EM6F

Dimensions (H
x W x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.37 kg

0.40 kg

0.40 kg

EM6FA

0.40 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of the EM6TA: < 16.2 W
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W


Power consumption of the EM6FA: < 15.4 W

3.12 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.

3.12.1 Version Description


The functional version of the EMS6 is SL91.

3.12.2 Application
EMS6 boards transmit Ethernet services on TDM radio networks or native Ethernet services
from Hybrid radio networks through third-party SDH optical networks.

Transmitting Ethernet Services over SDH/PDH Radio


If OptiX RTN 910 NEs transmit Ethernet services over SDH/PDH radio, EMS6 boards receive,
transmit, encapsulate, and map Ethernet services that come from customer premises or Layer 2
networks.
Figure 3-87 Application scenario of EMS6 boards (1)

SDH network

TDM radio network

FE/GE
EMS6

CSTA

IF
board

IF
board

CSTA

Service
board

STM-N
STM-N

OptiX RTN 910

MSTP

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards, or general-purpose IF boards or XPIC
IF boards working in SDH radio mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are STM-1 interface boards.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Helping Hybrid Radio Services Traverse Third-Party SDH Optical Networks


If OptiX RTN 910 NEs converge Ethernet services over Hybrid radio and the converged Ethernet
services need to traverse third-party SDH optical networks, EMS6 boards can apply to the NEs
to encapsulate and map converged and locally received Ethernet services.
Figure 3-88 Application scenario of EMS6 boards (2)

Hybrid radio network

SDH network

EMS6
IF
board

CSHx

Service
board

STM-N
STM-N

OptiX RTN 910

CSHx: CSHA/CSHB/CSHC

MSTP

Traffic flow

NOTE

l As shown in the preceding figure, the traffic flow is as follows: Hybrid IF board sends received Ethernet
services to the packet switching unit of the CSHx board, the packet switching unit sends the Ethernet
services to the EMS6 board, the EMS6 board encapsulates the Ethernet services into VC-4s and
transmits the VC-4s to the cross-connect unit of the CSHx board, the cross-connect unit grooms the
VC-4s to SDH service ports, and the ports send the VC-4s to the third-party SDH optical network.
l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are STM-1 interface boards.
l CSHA/CSHB boards must work in conjunction with STM-1 interface boards for receiving and
transmitting STM-1 services.
l To transmit IEEE 1588v2 packets through Ethernet ports on system control, switching, and timing
boards, use CSHD/CSHE boards.

3.12.3 Functions and Features


The EMS6 receives/transmits 4xFE signals and 2xGE signals from the front panel and 1xGE
packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates these Ethernet signals into
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) signals to transmit the Ethernet signals on the SDH
network. The EMS6 supports transparent service transmission and Layer 2 switching.
Table 3-189 lists the functions and features that the EMS6 supports.
Table 3-189 Functions and features
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives/transmits 4xFE signals, 2xGE signals, and


1xGE packet plane signals, and performs EoSDH
processing.

Port specifications

FE
electrical
port

Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

GE port

Provides two GE ports by using small form-factor


pluggable (SFP) modules of any of the following types:
l 1000Base-SX
l 1000Base-LX
l 1000Base-VX
l 1000Base-ZX
l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

Port attributes

Working
mode

l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation.


l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.

TAG
attributes

l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet


port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.

Services

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Jumbo
frame

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length


of 9600 bytes.

Traffic
control
function

Supports the port-based traffic control function that


complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Ethernet
private line
(EPL)
services

Supports the EPL services based on ports.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Encapsulation and
mapping

Description

Ethernet
virtual
private line
(EVPL)
services

Supports the following types of EVPL services:

Ethernet
private
LAN
(EPLAN)
services

Supports the EPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1d


bridges.

Ethernet
virtual
private
LAN
(EVPLAN)
services

Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:

Encapsulati
on format

Supports the following encapsulation formats:

l EVPL services based on port+VLAN


l EVPL services based on QinQ

l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges


l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

l Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)


l High Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
l Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Maximum
TDM
service
capacity
supported
by the
backplane

4xVC-4

Maximum
number of
VCTRUN
Ks
supported
by the board

Maximum
bandwidth
supported
by each
VCTRUN
K

l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK7: 100 Mbit/s

Link
capacity
adjustment
scheme
(LCAS)

Supported

l VCTRUNK8: 622 Mbit/s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Link aggregation
group (LAG)

Inter-board
LAG

Not supported

Intra-board
LAG

Supported
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support intraboard LAG.

Ethernet ring protection switching


(ERPS)

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T


G.8032/Y.1344.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Supports the STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol


(RSTP), which comply with IEEE 802.1w.

IGMP Snooping

Supported

Link state pass through (LPT)a

Supported
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support LPT.

QoS

Traffic
classificatio
n

Supports the following traffic classification modes:


l Traffic classification based on ports
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID

CoS

Schedules packets in traffic flows to eight egress


queues of different CoSs by:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value

Committed
access rate
(CAR)

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.

Shaping

Supports traffic shaping for a specific port or egress


queue.

Queue
scheduling
policy

Supports the following scheduling policies:


l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

ETH OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM


function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support IEEE
802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.

Remote monitoring (RMON)

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Clock

Clock
source

Synchronous Ethernet

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:

NOTE
Ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports) on the EMS6 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.

l Protection based on clock source priorities


l Protection by running the Synchronization Status
Message (SSM) protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types:


l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports).
l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 8 (bridging port).
l Supports inloops on VC-3 paths.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Traffic
monitoring

Supported

Warm reset
and cold
reset

Supported

Board
manufactur
ing
information
query

Supported

Board
power
consumptio
n
information
query

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Board
temperature
detection

Supported

NOTE

a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur on a service access node or an intermediate
transmission network, and instruct the service access node to immediately start the backup network for
communication. The LPT function ensures the normal transmission of important data.

3.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EMS6, using FE/GE signal
processing as an example.

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-89 Functional block diagram of the EMS6
Backplane
Ethernet signal
FE signal

GE signal

FE signal
access
unit
GE signal
access
unit

Ethernet
processing
unit

Encapsulation
unit

SDH signal
Logic
processing
unit

Mapping
unit

GE signal

Management
control signal

Packet
switching unit

Control signal of the board


Control bus

Logic
control
unit
+3.3 V power supplied
to the board

Power
supply unit

+3.3 V backup power


supplied to certain auxiliary
circuits on the board
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cross-connect
unit

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

System control and


communication unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

232

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-190 Signal processing in the receive direction
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

FE/GE signal access


unit

l Receives FE/GE signals. If GE signals are received


through a GE optical port, O/E conversion is required.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE/GE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code processing, and
Ethernet performance measurement for frames.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Receives Ethernet signals from the FE/GE signal


access unit and GE signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic
classification and committed access rate (CAR)
control, for Ethernet data frames based on service
types.
l Processes tags based on service types.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames based on service types.

Encapsulation unit

Performs the High Level Data Link Control (HDLC),


Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS), or Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP) encapsulation for Ethernet frames.

Mapping unit

Maps encapsulated Ethernet data frames into VC-12s,


VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.

Logic processing
unit

Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to


the cross-connect unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-191 Signal processing in the transmit direction

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing unit

Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals


from the cross-connect unit.

Mapping unit

Demaps encapsulated Ethernet data frames from VC-12s,


VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.

Encapsulation unit

Decapsulates Ethernet data frames after they are


demapped.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Ethernet processing
unit

l Processes tags based on service types.


l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling, for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs Ethernet data frame delimitation, preamble
addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet
performance measurement.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE/GE signal
access unit or the GE port connected to the packet
switching unit based on egress tags contained in the
Ethernet data frames.

FE signal access unit

Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for


Ethernet data frames, and transmits generated FE/GE
signals through Ethernet ports. For a GE optical port, the
FE signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion
before transmitting signals through the GE optical port.

Control Signal Processing


The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit using the
system control bus. The logic control unit issues configuration and query commands from the
system control and communication unit to various units on the board, and reports command
responses, alarms, and performance events reported by various units on the board to the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48
V power into +3.3 V power using the DC-DC module, and supplies the +3.3 V power to the
other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to certain auxiliary circuits on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.12.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, four FE ports, and two small form-factor pluggable (SFP) GE ports on the
front panel.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front Panel Diagram

EMS6

STAT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2

Figure 3-90 Front panel of the EMS6

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Indicators
Table 3-192 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green)

l The upper layer software is being


initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100


ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the


power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or loading


upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SRV

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The system is working normally.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

LINK1

ACT1

LINK2

ACT2

3 Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

On (green)

The GE1 port is connected correctly.

Blinks on (red) and off at 300


ms intervals

The receive optical power at the GE1 optical


port is higher than the upper threshold.

Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700


ms off

The receive optical power at the GE1 optical


port is lower than the lower threshold.

Off

The GE1 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

Blinking (yellow)

The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE1 port is not receiving or


transmitting data.

On (green)

The GE2 port is connected correctly.

Blinks on (red) and off at 300


ms intervals

The receive optical power at the GE2 optical


port is higher than the upper threshold.

Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700


ms off

The receive optical power at the GE2 optical


port is lower than the lower threshold.

Off

The GE1 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

Blinking (yellow)

The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE2 port is not receiving or


transmitting data.

Ports
Table 3-193 Description of the ports on the EMS6

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

GE1
GE2

GE service port
(using SFP
modules)

RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC


SFP optical module

5.9 Network Cable/5.5 Fiber


Jumper

FE1

FE service port

RJ45

5.9 Network Cable

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Port

3 Boards

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

FE2
FE3
FE4

NOTE

On the network management system (NMS), GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively,
and FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.

The performance of the FE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X)
standard, and the performance of the GE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. The two types of ports
support the MDI, MDI-X, auto-MDI, and auto-MDI-X modes. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-91. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-194 and Table
3-195.
Figure 3-91 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-194 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

3 Boards

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

Table 3-195 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-196.
Table 3-196 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On

The link is working properly.

Off

The link is interrupted.

On or blinking

The port is transmitting or receiving


data.

ACT (yellow)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off

The port is not transmitting or


receiving data.

SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports on the EMS6. One SFP optical module
provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-92, in which TX represents the
transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-92 Ports of an SFP optical module

RX

TX

3.12.6 Valid Slots


The EMS6 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EMS6 on the network
management system (NMS) are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-93 Slots for the EMS6 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3 (EMS6)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (EMS6)
Slot 1

Figure 3-94 Logical slots for the EMS6 on the NMS


Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (EMS6)
Slot 1

Slot 4 (EMS6)

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Table 3-197 Slot configuration for the EMS6

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 4 > Slot 3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.12.7 Types of SFP Modules


The GE port on the EMS6 board supports multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules.
Table 3-198 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports
Part Number

Type

34060286

1000Base-SX

34060473

1000Base-LX

34060298

1000Base-VX (40 km, 1310 nm)

34060513

1000Base-VX (40 km, 1550 nm)

34060360

1000Base-ZX

34100052

10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EMS6 boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code.
Table 3-199 Board feature codes of the EMS6
Board Feature Code

Module Type

01

1000Base-SX

02

1000Base-LX

03

10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

NOTE

If the board feature code in the bar code of the EMS6 is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EMS6.

3.12.8 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EMS6.

Related References
E.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port
E.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port
E.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames
E.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.12.9 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of GE Optical Ports


The GE optical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the GE optical ports.
Table 3-200 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance
transmission)
Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

850

1310

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

0.5

10

Operating wavelength (nm)

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm)

-9 to -3

-9 to -3

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-17

-20

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

9.5

9.5

Table 3-201 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

1310

1550

1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

40

40

80

Operating wavelength (nm)

1270 to 1350

1480 to 1580

1500 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm)

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-2 to +5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-VX
(40 km)

1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-23

-22

-22

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

-3

-3

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Performance of GE Electrical Ports


The GE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Table 3-202 GE electrical interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)


MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type

RJ45

Performance of FE Electrical Ports


The FE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-203 FE electrical interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)


MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type

RJ45

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-204 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.50 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EMS6: < 16.5 W

3.13 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.

3.13.1 Version Description


The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.

3.13.2 Application
EFP8 boards help transmit a small number of Ethernet services on TDM radio networks, or
transmit native Ethernet services from Hybrid radio networks on third-party TDM networks.

Helping Transmit Ethernet Services over SDH/PDH Radio


If OptiX RTN 910 NEs transmit Ethernet services over SDH/PDH radio, EFP8 boards receive,
transmit, encapsulate, and map Ethernet services that come from customer premises or Layer 2
networks.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-95 Application scenario of EFP8 boards (1)

E1
TDM radio network

FE
EFP8

CSTA

IF
board

IF
board

CSTA

TDM transmission
network

Service
board

E1
E1

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards, or general-purpose IF boards or XPIC
IF boards working in SDH radio mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are E1 interface boards.

Helping Hybrid Radio Services Traverse Third-Party TDM Networks


If OptiX RTN 910 NEs converge Ethernet services over Hybrid radio and the converged Ethernet
services need to traverse third-party SDH/PDH networks, EFP8 boards can apply to the NEs to
encapsulate and map converged and locally received Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-96 Application scenario of EFP8 boards (2)

E1
Hybrid radio network

TDM transmission
network

EFP8
IF
board

CSHx

Service
board

E1
E1

OptiX RTN 910

CSHx: CSHA/CSHB/CSHC

Traffic flow

NOTE

l As shown in the preceding figure, the traffic flow is as follows: Hybrid IF board sends received Ethernet
services to the packet switching unit of the CSHx board, the packet switching unit sends the Ethernet
services to the EFP8 board, the EFP8 board encapsulates the Ethernet services into E1s and transmits
the E1s to the cross-connect unit of the CSHx board, the cross-connect unit grooms the E1s to E1
service ports, and the ports then send the E1s to the third-party TDM network.
l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are E1 interface boards.
l To transmit IEEE 1588v2 packets through Ethernet ports on system control, switching, and timing
boards, use CSHD/CSHE boards.

3.13.3 Functions and Features


The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals
from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the
Ethernet signals on the PDH network.
Table 3-205 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports.
Table 3-205 Functions and features

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and 1xGE packet


plane signals and performs EoPDH processing.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Port
specifications

FE electrical port:
10/100BASE-T
(X)

Port attributes

Working mode

The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation.

TAG attributes

l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet


port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.

Services

Jumbo frame

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame


length of 2000 bytes.

Traffic control
function

Supports the port-based traffic control function that


complies with IEEE 802.3x.

EPL services

Supports the EPL services that are based on port.

EVPL services

Supports the following types of EVPL services:


l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
l EVPL services based on QinQ

EPLAN services

Supports the EPLAN services that are based on IEEE


802.1d bridges.

EVPLAN services

Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:


l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad
bridges

Encapsulation
and mapping

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Encapsulation
format

Generic framing procedure (GFP)

Maximum number
of VCTRUNKs
supported by the
board

16

Maximum TDM
service capacity
supported by the
backplane

1xVC-4 (63xE1)

Maximum number
of E1s that can be
bound with a
single VCTRUNK

16xE1

Link capacity
adjustment
scheme (LCAS)

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

LAG

Inter-board LAG

Not supported

Intra-board LAG

Supported
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support intraboard LAG.

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the


CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

IGMP snooping function

Supported

LPTa

Supported
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support LPT.

QoS

Traffic
classification

l Traffic classification based on ports


l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
+VLAN PRI
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID

CoS

Grooms packets in traffic flows to eight egress


queues that belong to different service classes based
on the following conditions:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value

ETH OAM

CAR

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.

Shaping

Supports traffic shaping for queues at ports.

Queue scheduling
policies

Supports SP+WRR.
l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not support the
OAM function that complies with IEEE 802.3ah.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Clock

Synchronous Ethernet

Clock source

NOTE
Ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) on the EFP8 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.

Clock protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:


l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types:


l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports)
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 10 (bridging port)
l Inloops on VC-12 paths

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information query

Supported

Board temperature
detection

Supported

NOTE

a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate
transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of
starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of
important data.

3.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-97 Functional block diagram of the EFP8
Backplane
Ethernet signal
FE signal

FE
signal
access
unit

Ethernet
processing
unit

Encapsulation
unit

PDH signal
Logic
processing
unit

Mapping
unit

Management
control signal

GE signal

Cross-connect
unit

Packet
switching unit

Control signal of the board


Control bus

Logic
control
unit
+3.3 V power supplied
to the board

Power
supply unit

+3.3 V backup power


supplied to the board
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board

System control and


communication unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-206 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

FE signal access unit

l Receives/Transmits FE signals.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.

Ethernet processing
unit

l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet


switching unit.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service
categories.
l Processes tags based on service categories.
l Forwards data frames based on service categories.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Encapsulation unit

Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Mapping unit

l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual


concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames
to proper VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.

Logic processing
unit

Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to


the cross-connect unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-207 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing unit

Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals


from the cross-connect unit.

Mapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.


l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1
payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.

Encapsulation unit

Decapsulates signals after demapping.

Ethernet signal
processing unit

l Processes tags based on service categories.


l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access
unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet
switching unit according to the egress flag.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

FE signal access unit

Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for


Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals
to an Ethernet port.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Control Signal Processing


The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit over the
system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and
communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit.
The command response reported by each unit on the board, and alarms and performance events
are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.13.5 Front Panel


There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

PROG

SRV

STAT

EFP8

Figure 3-98 Front panel of the EFP8

Indicators
Table 3-208 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on or


being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100


ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the


power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or loading


upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SRV

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

Ports
Table 3-209 Description of the ports on the EFP8

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Port

Description

FE1 to
FE8

FE port

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

RJ45

5.9 Network Cable

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin
assignments for the ports, see Table 3-210 and Table 3-211. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-99.
Figure 3-99 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-210 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin

10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal

Function

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

RX+

Receiving data (+)

Reserved

Reserved

RX-

Receiving data (-)

Reserved

Reserved

Table 3-211 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal

Function

RX+

Receiving data (+)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

Reserved

Reserved

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

Reserved

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

3 Boards

10/100BASE-T(X)

Signal

Function

Reserved

The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-212.
Table 3-212 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On

The link is working properly.

Off

The link is interrupted.

On or blinking

The port is transmitting or receiving


data.

Off

The port is not transmitting or


receiving data.

ACT (yellow)

3.13.6 Valid Slots


The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the
same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-100 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3 (EFP8)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 1

Figure 3-101 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS


Slot 5
(PIU)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 1

Slot 10

Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Slot 8

Slot 9

254

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-213 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.

Related References
E.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port
E.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port
E.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames
E.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

3.13.8 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of FE Electrical Ports


The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-214 FE electrical interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)


MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type

RJ45

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-215 Mechanical behavior

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.6 kg

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W

3.14 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide
STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by
the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.

3.14.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SL1D/SL1DA is SL91.

3.14.2 Application
SL1D/SL1DA boards help OptiX RTN 910 NEs converge TDM services from radio networks
before forwarding the services to SDH networks, or help OptiX RTN 910 NEs build SDH
networks together with SDH equipment.
NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 910, configure CSHC/CSTA boards if SDH ports are required. Configure SL1D/
SL1DA boards only if STM-1 ports on CSHC/CSTA boards cannot meet customers' requirements.

Converging TDM Services from Radio Networks


SL1D/SL1DA boards converge TDM services from radio networks before forwarding the
services to SDH networks.
Figure 3-102 Application scenario of SL1D/SL1DA boards (1)

Radio network

IF
board

OptiX RTN 910

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

SDH network

CSTA/
CSHA/
CSHB/
CSHC

SL1D/
SL1DA

STM-N

MSTP

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

l Converged services shown in the preceding figure can be SDH/PDH services from TDM radio networks
or native E1/STM-1 services from IP radio networks.
l Transmission lines between the OptiX RTN equipment and the SDH network can be configured with
linear MSP.
l OptiX RTN 910 NEs can work as nodes on SDH rings, as shown in Figure 3-103. Services on such
SDH rings can be configured with SNCP.

Figure 3-103 Application scenario of SL1D/SL1DA boards (2)

Radio network

IF
board

SDH network

CSTA/
CSHA/
CSHB/
CSHC

SL1D/
SL1DA

STM-N

SL1D/
SL1DA

STM-N

OptiX RTN 910

MSTP

Helping OptiX RTN 910 NEs Build SDH Networks Together with SDH Equipment
OptiX RTN 910 NEs using SL1D/SL1DA boards can build SDH networks together with SDH
equipment. In this scenario, radio links function as dark fibers.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-104 Application scenario of SL1D/SL1DA boards (3)

SDH network

SL1D/
SL1DA

STM-N

CSTA/
CSHA/
CSHB/
CSHC

IF
board

OptiX RTN 910

IF
board

CSTA/
CSHA/
CSHB/
CSHC

SL1D/
SL1DA

STM-N

MSTP

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards working in SDH radio mode, or generalpurpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working in SDH radio or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l SL1DA boards must be installed if K bytes need to be transparently transmitted.
l Radio links can form SDH rings together with SDH fiber links. Services on such SDH rings can be
configured with SNCP.

3.14.3 Functions and Features


The SL1D/SL1DA receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Table 3-216 lists the functions and features that the SL1D/SL1DA supports.
Table 3-216 Functions and features
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical


signals.

Port
specifications

Optical ports

l Adopts SFP optical modules and supports the


optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply
with ITU-T G.957.

Electrical ports

l Adopts SFP electrical modules.


l The performance of the electrical ports complies
with ITU-T G.703.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Protection

Linear MSP

Supported

SNCP

Supported

Clock source

Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

Clock
protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:

Clock

l Protection based on clock source priorities


l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN

Outband DCN

Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is


composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.

K byte pass-through

Supported only by the SL1DA

OM

Supports the following loopback types:

Loopback

l Outloops at optical/electrical ports


l Inloops at optical/electrical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops on VC-4 paths

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Warm reset and


cold reset

Supported

Setting of the
on/off state of a
laser

Supported

ALS functiona

Supported

In-service
FPGA loading

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

Detection and
query of SFP
module
information

Supported

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:


l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

3.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one STM-1 optical signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D/SL1DA.

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-105 Functional block diagram of the SL1D/SL1DA
Backplane

Service bus

Overhead bus

Logic processing
unit

Overhead
processing unit

STM-1

O/E conversion
unit

STM-1

Crossconnect unit
System control and
communication unit

System control and


communication unit

Control bus

Logic control
unit
Power supplied to the
other units on the board

+3.3 V

Clock signal provided to the


other units on the board

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-217 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D/SL1DA
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

O/E conversion unit

l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.


l Detects R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Overhead processing
unit

l Restores clock signals.


l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the logic processing unit.

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-218 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D/SL1DA
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

Overhead processing
unit

l Sets higher order path overheads.


l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

O/E conversion unit

Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing


The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.14.5 Front Panel


There are indicators, STM-1 ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

SL1D

SL1D

STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2

Figure 3-106 Front panel of the SL1D (with optical ports)

STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2

SL1DA

Figure 3-107 Front panel of the SL1DA (with optical ports)


CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SL1D

SL1D

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2

Figure 3-108 Front panel of the SL1D (with electrical ports)

262

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

SL1DA

STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2

Figure 3-109 Front panel of the SL1DA (with electrical ports)

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

Indicators
Table 3-219 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

LOS1

LOS2

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

Off

The services are not


configured.

On (red)

The first port of the SL1D/


SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.

Off

The first port of the SL1D/


SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.

On (red)

The second port of the


SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The second port of the


SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Ports
Table 3-220 Description of the ports
Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding
Cable

TX1

Transmit port of the


first STM-1 port

RX1

Receive port of the


first STM-1 port

l SFP optical
module: LC
l SFP electrical
module: SAA
straight/female

TX2

Transmit port of the


second STM-1 port

l SFP optical
module: 5.5
Fiber Jumper
l SFP electrical
module: 5.6
STM-1 Cable

RX2

Receive port of the


second STM-1 port

l SFP optical
module: LC
l SFP electrical
module: SAA
straight/female

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.14.6 Valid Slots


The SL1D/SL1DA can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on
the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-110 Slots for the SL1D/SL1DA in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 1

Figure 3-111 Logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the NMS


Slot 5
(PIU)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 1

Slot 10

Slot 7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Slot 8

Slot 9

264

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-221 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.14.7 Board Feature Code


The board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-222 Board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA
Feature Code

Type of Optical Module

Part Number of the


Optical Module

01

Ie-1

34060287

02

S-1.1

34060276

03

L-1.1

34060281

04

L-1.2

34060282

05

STM-1e

34100104

3.14.8 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D/SL1DA.

Related References
E.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
E.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
E.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.14.9 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance


The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-223 STM-1 optical interface performance


Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

155520

Classification code

Ie-1

S-1.1

L-1.1

L-1.2

Fiber type

Multi-mode
fiber

Single-mode
fiber

Single-mode
fiber

Single-mode
fiber

Transmission distance
(km)

15

40

80

Operating wavelength
(nm)

1270 to 1380

1261 to 1360

1263 to 1360

1480 to 1580

Mean launched power


(dBm)

-19 to -14

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0

Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)

-30

-28

-34

-34

Minimum overload (dBm)

-14

-8

-10

-10

Minimum extinction ratio


(dB)

10

8.2

10

10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of
SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance


The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 3-224 STM-1 electrical interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

155520

Code type

CMI

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm)

75

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-225 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance
SL1D

SL1DA

Dimensions (H x W x
D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.30 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SL1D: < 3.4 W
Power consumption of the SL1DA: < 3.3 W

3.15 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.

3.15.1 Version Description


The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.

3.15.2 Application
ML1/MD1 boards receive and transmit E1 services on OptiX RTN 910 NEs that transmit E1carried ATM/CES services in PWE3 mode. The selection of MD1 or ML1 boards depends on
desired port quantities.
NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 910, configure ML1/MD1 boards only if Smart E1 ports on system control, switching,
and timing boards cannot meet customers' requirements.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-112 Application scenario of ML1/MD1 boards

MPLS tunnel

PW1

...

PWn

Packet radio network

CES E1
CSHD/
CSHE

ML1/
MD1

ATM E1

IF
board

IF
board

CSHD/
CSHE

ML1/
MD1

CES E1
ATM E1

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE

IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working in
native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.

3.15.3 Functions and Features


The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-226 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports.
Table 3-226 Functions and features
Function and Feature

Description
ML1

MD1

Basic functions

Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports


flexible configuration of E1 service categories.

E1 service categories

Supports the following E1 service categories:


l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1

Port
specifications

75-ohm/120ohm E1 port

Fractional E1
ATM/IMA

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

16

32

Supports transparent service transmission at the 64


kbit/s level.
Maximum
number of ATM
services

64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

3 Boards

Description
ML1

MD1

Maximum
number of ATM
connections

256

ATM traffic
management

Supported

ATM
encapsulation
mode

Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:


l N-to-one VPC
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC

Maximum
number of
concatenated
ATM cells

31

ATM OAM

Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level),


including the following functions:
l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect
indication (RDI)
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test

CES

Maximum
number of IMA
groups

16

32

Maximum
number of
members in an
IMA group

16

Maximum
number of
services

16

Encapsulation
mode

Supports the following encapsulation modes:

32

l CESoPSN
l SAToP

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Service
category

Point-to-point services

Compression of
vacant slots

Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

269

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

3 Boards

Description
ML1

Jitter buffering
time (us)

375-16000

Packet loading
time (us)

125-5000

CES ACR

Supported

Retiming

Supported

Clock protection
OM

MD1

Supports clock protection based on clock source


priorities.
Loopback

Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Cold reset and


warm reset

Supported

PRBS tests at E1
ports

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

3.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-113 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1
Backplane

Service
bus

Logic processing
unit

Service
processing unit

E1

Signal interface
unit

E1

GE bus

Packet switching unit

Control bus

System control and


communication unit

Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power
supplied to the board
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board

Power
supply unit

Clock signal provided to the


other units of the board

Clock unit

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-227 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Signal interface unit

l Receives external E1 signals.


l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.

Service processing
unit

l Frames E1 signals.
l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

271

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Implements the conversion from the internal service


bus into the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-228 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Receives service signals from the packet switching


unit.
l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the
backplane into the internal service bus.

Service processing
unit

l Decapsulates service signals.


l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.

Signal interface unit

l Performs HDB3 coding.


l Performs clock re-timing.
l Performs pulse shaping.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.

Control Signal Processing


The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.15.5 Front Panel


There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

ML1

STAT
SRV

Figure 3-114 Front panel of the ML1


16
E1

MD1

STAT
SRV

Figure 3-115 Front panel of the MD1


16
1

32
17

Indicators
Table 3-229 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off

The services are not


configured.

Ports
Table 3-230 Description of the ports on the ML1
Port

Description

Connector
Type

Corresponding Cable

1 to 16

The first to sixteenth


E1 ports

Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to


the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

Table 3-231 Description of the ports on the MD1


Port

Description

Connector
Type

Corresponding Cable

1 to 16

The first to sixteenth


E1 ports

Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to


the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

17 to 32

The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports

Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to


the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-116 shows the front view of
an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-232 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-116 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-232 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

The first received E1


differential signal (+)

25

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The first received E1


differential signal (-)

26

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The second received E1


differential signal (+)

27

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The second received E1


differential signal (-)

28

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The third received E1


differential signal (+)

29

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The third received E1


differential signal (-)

30

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (+)

31

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (-)

32

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The fifth received E1


differential signal (+)

33

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

10

The fifth received E1


differential signal (-)

34

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

11

The sixth received E1


differential signal (+)

35

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

12

The sixth received E1


differential signal (-)

36

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

13

The seventh received E1


differential signal (+)

37

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

14

The seventh received E1


differential signal (-)

38

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

15

The eighth received E1


differential signal (+)

39

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

16

The eighth received E1


differential signal (-)

40

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

17

The ninth received E1


differential signal (+)

41

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

18

The ninth received E1


differential signal (-)

42

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

19

The tenth received E1


differential signal (+)

43

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

20

The tenth received E1


differential signal (-)

44

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

21

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (+)

45

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

22

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (-)

46

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

23

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (+)

47

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

24

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (-)

48

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

49

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

73

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

50

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

74

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

51

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

75

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

52

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

76

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

53

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

77

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

54

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

78

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

55

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

79

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

56

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

80

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

3.15.6 Valid Slots


The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-117 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

276

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-118 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS


Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1

Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Table 3-233 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.15.7 Board Feature Code


The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-234 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1
Board Feature Code

Port Impedance (Ohm)

75

120

3.15.8 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.

Related References
E.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
E.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

3.15.9 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

277

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-235 E1 interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

2048

Code pattern

HDB3

Impedance (ohm)

75

120

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

One symmetrical wire pair

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-236 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance
ML1

MD1

Dimensions (H x W x
D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.45 kg

0.50 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W
Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W

3.16 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.

3.16.1 Version Description


The SP3S has two functional versions: SL91SP3SVER.B and SL91SP3SVER.C. The SP3D also
has two functional versions: TNH1SP3DVER.B and TNH1SP3DVER.C. The difference
between VER.B and VER.C is that path indication on the front panel is optimized and the board
power consumption is reduced.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

278

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.16.2 Application
SP3S/SP3D boards receive and transmit E1 services on OptiX RTN 910 NEs that transmit E1
services in native mode. The E1 services come from customer premises or TDM networks.
NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 910, configure SP3S/SP3D boards only if E1 ports on system control, switching, and
timing boards cannot meet customers' requirements.

Figure 3-119 Application scenario of SP3S/SP3D boards

Radio network

E1

SP3S/
SP3D

CSTA/
CSHA/
CSHB/
CSHC

CSTA/
CSHA/
CSHB/
CSHC

IF
board

IF
board

SP3S/
SP3D

E1

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE

IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards working in PDH radio mode, or generalpurpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working in native E1+Ethernet mode.

3.16.3 Functions and Features


The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-237 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports.
Table 3-237 Functions and features
Function and Feature

Description
SP3S

Basic functions
Port
specifications
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

SP3D

Receives and transmits E1 signals.


75-ohm/120ohm E1 port

16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

279

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Function and Feature

3 Boards

Description
SP3S

Clock

OM

SP3D

Clock source

Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the


first or fifth E1 signal.

Clock
protection

Supports clock protection based on clock source


priorities.

E1 retiming
function

Supported

Loopback

Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Cold reset and


warm reset

Supported

PRBS tests at E1
ports

Supported

Board
manufacturing
information
query

Supported

Board power
consumption
information
query

Supported

3.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

280

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-120 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane

Codec unit

Interface unit

E1

Service bus

Logic processing
unit

Mapping/Demapping
unit

E1 signal

E1

Control bus

Cross-connect unit

System control and


communication unit

Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power supplied
to the board

Power
supply unit

+3.3 V backup power


supplied to the board
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V

Clock
unit

System clock signal

NOTE

The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48
V power into +3.3 V power.

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction


Table 3-238 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Interface unit

External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and


then transmitted to the board.

Codec unit

l Equalizes the received signals.


l Recovers clock signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

281

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Mapping/
Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.


l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.


l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-239 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

Logic processing
unit

l Processes clock signals.

Mapping/
Demapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals


from the cross-connect unit.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.


l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
specific alarms and performance events.
l Extracts E1 signals.

Codec unit

Performs HDB3 coding.

Interface unit

E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then


transmitted to an external cable.

Control Signal Processing


The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

282

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit


The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l

Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3
V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power
supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from
-48 V power into +3.3 V power.

Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.16.5 Front Panel


There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

SP3S

SP3S

STAT
SRV

Figure 3-121 Front panel of the SP3SVER.B


E1
1-16

16
STAT
SRV

SP3S

Figure 3-122 Front panel of the SP3SVER.C

21
1

42
22

SP3D

SP3D

STAT
SRV

Figure 3-123 Front panel of the SP3DVER.B

SP3D

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

STAT
SRV

Figure 3-124 Front panel of the SP3DVER.C


16
1

32
17

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

283

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-240 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

Off

The services are not


configured.

Ports
Table 3-241 Description of the ports on the SP3S(VER.B and VER.C)
Port

Description

Connector
Type

Corresponding Cable

1-16

The first to sixteenth


E1 ports

Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to


the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

Table 3-242 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.B

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Port

Description

Connector
Type

Corresponding Cable

1-21

The first to sixteenth


E1 ports

Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to


the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

284

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Port

Description

Connector
Type

Corresponding Cable

22-42

The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports

Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to


the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

NOTE

On the OptiX RTN 910, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1
signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.

Table 3-243 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.C


Port

Description

Connector
Type

Corresponding Cable

1-16

The first to sixteenth


E1 ports

Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to


the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

17-32

The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports

Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to


the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-125 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-244 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-125 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

285

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-244 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

The first received E1


differential signal (+)

25

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The first received E1


differential signal (-)

26

The first transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The second received E1


differential signal (+)

27

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The second received E1


differential signal (-)

28

The second transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The third received E1


differential signal (+)

29

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The third received E1


differential signal (-)

30

The third transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (+)

31

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

The fourth received E1


differential signal (-)

32

The fourth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

The fifth received E1


differential signal (+)

33

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

10

The fifth received E1


differential signal (-)

34

The fifth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

11

The sixth received E1


differential signal (+)

35

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

12

The sixth received E1


differential signal (-)

36

The sixth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

13

The seventh received E1


differential signal (+)

37

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

14

The seventh received E1


differential signal (-)

38

The seventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

15

The eighth received E1


differential signal (+)

39

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

16

The eighth received E1


differential signal (-)

40

The eighth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

17

The ninth received E1


differential signal (+)

41

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

18

The ninth received E1


differential signal (-)

42

The ninth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

286

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

19

The tenth received E1


differential signal (+)

43

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (+)

20

The tenth received E1


differential signal (-)

44

The tenth transmitted E1 differential


signal (-)

21

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (+)

45

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

22

The eleventh received E1


differential signal (-)

46

The eleventh transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

23

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (+)

47

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

24

The twelfth received E1


differential signal (-)

48

The twelfth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

49

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

73

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

50

The thirteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

74

The thirteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

51

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

75

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

52

The fourteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

76

The fourteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

53

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

77

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

54

The fifteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

78

The fifteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

55

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (+)

79

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (+)

56

The sixteenth received E1


differential signal (-)

80

The sixteenth transmitted E1


differential signal (-)

3.16.6 Valid Slots


The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-126 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

287

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-127 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS


Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1

Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Table 3-245 Slot allocation


Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.16.7 Board Feature Code


The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-246 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D
Board Feature Code

Port Impedance (Ohm)

120

75

3.16.8 Board Parameter Settings


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.

Related References
E.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports
E.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

3.16.9 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

288

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-247 E1 interface performance
Item

Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

2048

Code pattern

HDB3

Impedance (ohm)

75

120

Wire pair in each


transmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

One symmetrical wire pair

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-248 Mechanical behavior
Item

Performance
SP3SVER.B

SP3SVER.C

Dimensio
ns (H x W
x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.50 kg

0.40 kg

SP3DVER.B

SP3SVER.C

0.64 kg

0.54 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.B: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.C: < 4.8 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.B: < 9.6 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.C: < 8.3 W

3.17 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

3.17.1 Version Description


The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

289

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.17.2 Functions and Features


The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and
information reporting.
Table 3-249 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.
Table 3-249 Functions and features
Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Power access

One PIU is provided and the PIU accesses two -48 V


DC or -60 V DC power inputs.

Power output

The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power.

Protection

Supports 1+1 HSB protection.

Power
protection

l Protection against overcurrent

Surge
protection

Supported

Protection

l Protection against short circuits

Board power consumption


information query

Supported

Surge protection status monitoring

Supported

3.17.3 Working Principle


The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication
control unit.

Functional Block Diagram


Figure 3-128 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.
Figure 3-128 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Backplane
-48 V/-60 V

Protection and
detection unit

-48 V/-60 V

Protection and
detection unit

EMI filtering
unit

EMI filtering
unit

Detection
signal

Board operating in distributed


power supply mode

-48 V 2
Board operating in distributed
power supply mode

Detection
signal
Communicatio
n control unit

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

-48 V 1

System control and


communication unit
+3.3 V

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Protection and Detection Unit


The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:
l

Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.

Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm.

Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.

EMI Filtering Unit


The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.

Communication Control Unit


The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:
l

PIU manufacturing information

PCB version information

Surge-protection failure information

PIU temperature

3.17.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-129 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 3-129 Front panel of the PIU

PWRA

PWRB

NEG1 RTN1 NEG2 RTN2


(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)

PIU

-48V

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

-60V

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

291

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-250 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Indicator

Status

Description

PWRA

On (green)

The power supply is connected.

Off

There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power


supply is connected incorrectly.

On (green)

The power supply is connected.

Off

There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power


supply is connected incorrectly.

PWRB

Ports
The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 3-251 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and
their respective usage.
Table 3-251 Description of the ports on the PIU
Port

Port
Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

NEG1
(-)

-48 V power
input port

Termi-blok stacking connector,


4-pin

5.1 Power Cable

RTN1
(+)

BGND power
input port

NEG2
(-)

-48 V power
input port

RTN2
(+)

BGND power
input port

Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power
operations.

CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power
supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

292

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.17.5 Valid Slots


The PIU can be inserted in slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS is the same as the
physical slot.
Figure 3-130 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 3

Slot 6

Slot 4
Slot 1

Figure 3-131 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU
Slot 5
(PIU)

Slot 6

Slot 4

Slot 3
Slot 1

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

3.17.6 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Table 3-252 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 3-252 Technical specifications for the PIU
Item

Performance

Dimensions

21.0 mm x 41.4 mm x 224.8 mm

Weight

0.12 kg

Power consumption

< 0.5 W

Input voltage

-38.4 V to -72.0 V

3.18 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

3.18.1 Version Description


The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

293

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.18.2 Functions and Features


The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
Table 3-253 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.
Table 3-253 Functions and features
Function and Feature

Description

Power input

Accesses one +12 V power input from the system control,


switching, and timing board.

Number of fans

Intelligent fan speed


adjustment

Supported

Protection

Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans and


protects fans against overcurrent.

OM

l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,


alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
l Provides alarm indicators.
l Supports board power consumption information query

NOTE

l When one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace it within 96 hours if the ambient temperature
reaches 40C; it is recommended that you replace it within 24 hours if the ambient temperature exceeds
40C.
l When more than one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace the failed fans immediately.

3.18.3 Working Principle


The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
Figure 3-132 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
Figure 3-132 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Backplane

Fan unit

+12 V

+12 V
Power unit
+12 V

Communication
detection signal

Communication
monitoring unit

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Communication
detection signal

System control and


communication unit

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power Unit
l

Receives +12 V power from the backplane.

Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, and overcurrent
protection.

Fan Unit
Three air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.

Communication Monitoring Unit


l

Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental


temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and
communication unit.

Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width
modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-254.
Table 3-254 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed
Working Temperature

Rotating Speed

25C

4800 rounds/minute

25C to 60C

Linear increase in accordance with the


temperature

60C

16000 rounds/minute

3.18.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-133 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 3-133 Front panel of the FAN

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

295

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-255 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN
Indicator

State

Meaning

FAN

On (green)

The fan is working properly.

On (red)

The fan is faulty.

Off

The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

ESD Wrist Strap Jack


An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.

Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l

ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.

3.18.5 Valid Slots


The FAN can be inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-134 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 5

Slot 3

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4
Slot 1

Figure 3-135 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS


Slot 5

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Slot 6
(FAN)

Slot 4

Slot 3
Slot 1

Slot 10

Slot 7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Slot 8

Slot 9

296

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.18.6 Technical Specifications


This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.
Table 3-256 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
Table 3-256 Technical specifications for the FAN
Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D)

28.5 mm x 42.0 mm x 217.6 mm

Weight

0.200 kg

Power consumption

< 2.3 W (room temperature)


< 17 W (high temperature)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

297

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Accessories

About This Chapter


The accessories of the OptiX RTN 910 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements.
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

298

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel
provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

R11

R12

R13

R14

R15

R16

T1

T2

T3

T4

T5

T6

T7

T8

T9

T10

T11

T12

T13

T14

T15

T16

1-8
9-16

Ports
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel
Port

Description

Connector Type

T1-T16

Transmit ports for the first to


sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)

BNC

R1-R16

Receive ports for the first to


sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)

1-8

The first to eighth E1 ports


(connected to an IDU)

9-16

The ninth to sixteenth E1


ports (connected to an IDU)

Grounding bolt

Connecting a PGND cable

DB37

NOTE

The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides
the pin assignments for the E1 port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

299

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

20

The first E1 received differential


signal (+)

21

The first E1 transmitted


differential signal (+)

The first E1 received differential


signal (-)

The first E1 transmitted


differential signal (-)

22

The second E1 received


differential signal (+)

23

The second E1 transmitted


differential signal (+)

The second E1 received


differential signal (-)

The second E1 transmitted


differential signal (-)

24

The third E1 received differential


signal (+)

25

The third E1 transmitted


differential signal (+)

The third E1 received differential


signal (-)

The third E1 transmitted


differential signal (-)

26

The fourth E1 received


differential signal (+)

27

The fourth E1 transmitted


differential signal (+)

The fourth E1 received


differential signal (-)

The fourth E1 transmitted


differential signal (-)

36

The fifth E1 received differential


signal (+)

35

The fifth E1 transmitted


differential signal (+)

17

The fifth E1 received differential


signal (-)

16

The fifth E1 transmitted


differential signal (-)

34

The sixth E1 received differential


signal (+)

33

The sixth E1 transmitted


differential signal (+)

15

The sixth E1 received differential


signal (-)

14

The sixth E1 transmitted


differential signal (-)

32

The seventh E1 received


differential signal (+)

31

The seventh E1 transmitted


differential signal (+)

13

The seventh E1 received


differential signal (-)

12

The seventh E1 transmitted


differential signal (-)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

300

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

30

The eighth E1 received


differential signal (+)

29

The eighth E1 transmitted


differential signal (+)

11

The eighth E1 received


differential signal (-)

10

The eighth E1 transmitted


differential signal (-)

Others

Reserved

4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.

4.2.1 Front Panel


There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of a PDU.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU
1

OUTPUT

ON

OUTPUT

ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

OFF
20A

20A 20A 20A

OFF

INPUT

20A

20A 20A 20A

1. Output power terminals (A)

2. PGND terminals

3. Input power terminals

4. Output power terminals (B)

5. Power switches (A)

6. Power switches (B)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

301

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Ports
Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU
Position

Port

Description

Output power
terminals (A)

Power output (+)

Power output (-)

PGND
terminals

Wiring terminal
for a two-hole
OT terminal

For connecting PGND cables

Input power
terminals

RTN1(+)

The first power input (+)

RTN2(+)

The second power input (+)

NEG1(-)

The first power input (-)

NEG2(-)

The second power input (-)

Output power
terminals (B)

Power output (+)

Power output (-)

Power
switches (A)

20 A

Switches for power outputs

Power
switches (B)

20 A

The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to


the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side A.
Switches for power outputs
The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to
the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side B.

4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle


After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.

Functions
l

The PDU supports two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.

Each input power supply provides four outputs.

The fuse capacity of the switch for each power output is 20 A.

The PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution.

Working Principle
A PDU consists of input terminals, output terminals, and circuit breakers and it performs simple
distribution operations for the input power.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

302

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU

OUTPUT A
+
SW1

SW2

INPUT

+
+

SW3

RTN1(+)
BGND

SW4

RTN2(+)

1
2

3
4

OUTPUT B
+

NEG1(-)
BGND

SW1

NEG2(-)
SW2

+
+

SW4

PGND

SW4

1
2

3
4

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode


A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default
mode.
A short-circuit copper bar inside a PDU controls the power distribution mode of the PDU.

DC-C Power Distribution Mode


To use DC-C power distribution, use the short-circuit copper bar to short-circuit terminal RTN1
(+), terminal RTN2(+), and PGND terminals.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

303

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution Mode


To use DC-I power distribution, remove the short-circuit copper bar.
Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

304

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cables

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on
the IDU 910.
5.1 Power Cable
A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
5.4 XPIC Cable
An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 910. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
5.6 STM-1 Cable
An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.8 Orderwire Cable
An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

305

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

PHONE port on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to
the port of the orderwire phone.
5.9 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

306

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

5.1 Power Cable


A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Single cord
end terminal

1U DC
connector

PGND cable
(black)

-48V power
cable (blue)

Table 5-1 Power cable specifications


Model

Cable

Terminal

2.5 mm2 power


cable and
terminal

Power cable, 450 V/


750 V, H07Z-K-2.5
mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero halogen
cable

Common terminal, single cord end terminal,


conductor cross section 2.5 mm2, 12.5 A,
insertion depth 8 mm

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 910, power cables with a 2.5 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum
distance of 50 m.

5.2 PGND Cable


PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.

5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable


An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

307

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
Main label
1

Cable tie

H.S.tube

L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT

2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments
None.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable


An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
Main label
1

L
Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments
None.

5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is
connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected
to the IF board.
NOTE

l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.


l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch
IF cable to the IF board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

309

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1
H.S.tube 2 PCS

L = 3 cm

2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male

2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Pin Assignments
None.

5.4 XPIC Cable


An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same
XPIC work group.
When the XPIC function is disabled for XPIC boards, an XPIC cable is used to connect the XIN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.
XPIC cables are available in the following types:
l

XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two
XPIC boards in the horizontal direction.

XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect
two XPIC boards in the vertical direction. These XPIC cables are also used to connect the
X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.

The OptiX RTN 910 uses XPIC cables with angle connectors.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

310

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable
1

L1
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male

Pin Assignments
None.

5.5 Fiber Jumper


A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 910. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.

Types of Fiber Jumpers


Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1

Connector 2

Cable

LC/PC

FC/PC

2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC

SC/PC

2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC

LC/PC

2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 910, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

311

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

312

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector

5.6 STM-1 Cable


An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 STM-1 cable

1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male

2. Main label

3. Coaxial cable

Pin Assignments
None.

Cable Specifications

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Item

Description

Connector

Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male

Cable model

Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

313

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Item

Description

Number of cores

One

Core diameter

Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal


insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34
mm)

Length

10 m

Fireproof class

CM

5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment


An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1
signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm
coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Main label
1
W

X1

A
ViewA

Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female

Pos.1

1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

314

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

NOTE

l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.


l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of
2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial
connector.

Pin Assignments
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

W
Core

Serial
No.

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

10

Ring

11

Tip

12

Ring

13

Tip

14

Ring

15

Tip

16

Ring

18

Ring

17

Tip

20

Ring

19

Tip

22

Ring

11

13

15

17

19

21

Remark
s

Pin

R0

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

Remark
s

Core

Serial
No.

25

Tip

T0

26

Ring

27

Tip

T1

28

Ring

29

Tip

T2

30

Ring

31

Tip

T3

32

Ring

33

Tip

10

T4

34

Ring

35

Tip

12

T5

36

Ring

37

Tip

14

T6

38

Ring

39

Tip

16

T7

40

Ring

42

Ring

18

T8

41

Tip

44

Ring

20

T9

43

Tip

46

Ring

22

T10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

315

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

5 Cables

W
Core

21

Tip

24

Ring

23

Tip

50

Ring

49

Tip

52

Ring

51

Tip

54

Ring

53

Tip

56

Ring

55
Shell

Serial
No.

Remark
s

Pin

W
Core

45

Tip

48

Ring

47

Tip

74

Ring

73

Tip

76

Ring

75

Tip

78

Ring

75

Tip

80

Ring

Tip

79

Tip

Braid

Shell

Braid

23

R11

25

R12

27

R13

29

R14

31

R15

Serial
No.

Remark
s

24

T11

26

T12

28

T13

30

T14

32

T15

Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable


Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Rema
rks

Tape
Color

Pin

Blue

Color
of the
Core

Relati
onshi
p

White

R0

Blue

Twiste
d pair

White

R1

Green

Twiste
d pair

White

R2

Grey

Twiste
d pair

Red

R3

Orang
e

Twiste
d pair

Red

R4

10

Brown

Twiste
d pair

Rema
rks

Tape
Color

Blue

Color
of the
Core

Relati
onshi
p

25

White

T0

26

Orang
e

Twiste
d pair

27

White

T1

28

Brown

Twiste
d pair

29

Red

T2

30

Blue

Twiste
d pair

31

Red

T3

32

Green

Twiste
d pair

33

Red

T4

34

Grey

Twiste
d pair

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

316

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

5 Cables

Rema
rks

Color
of the
Core

Relati
onshi
p

11

Black

R5

12

Blue

Twiste
d pair

13

Black

R6

14

Green

Twiste
d pair

15

Black

Twiste
d pair

R7

16

Grey

17

White

18

Blue

19

White

20

Green

21

White

22

Grey

23

Red

24

Orang
e

49

Red

50

Brown

51

Black

52

Blue

53

Black

54

Green

55

Black

56
Shell

Tape
Color

Pin

Rema
rks

Color
of the
Core

Relati
onshi
p

35

Black

T5

36

Orang
e

Twiste
d pair

37

Black

T6

38

Brown

Twiste
d pair

39

Yello
w

Twiste
d pair

T7

40

Blue

41

White

T8

42

Orang
e

Twiste
d pair

43

White

T9

44

Brown

Twiste
d pair

45

Red

T10

46

Blue

Twiste
d pair

47

Red

T11

48

Green

Twiste
d pair

73

Red

T12

74

Grey

Twiste
d pair

75

Black

T13

76

Orang
e

Twiste
d pair

77

Black

T14

78

Brown

Twiste
d pair

79

Yello
w

Twiste
d pair

T15

Grey

80

Blue

Braid

Shell

Braid

Twiste
d pair

R8

Twiste
d pair

R9

Twiste
d pair

R10

Twiste
d pair

R11

Twiste
d pair

R12

Twiste
d pair

R13

Twiste
d pair

R14

Twiste
d pair

R15

Orang
e

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Tape
Color

Orang
e

317

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel


An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel

X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female

X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male

Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"

Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Pin Assignments
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37
connector

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Wire

Connecto
r X1

Connecto
r X2/X3

Remarks

Connecto
r X1

Connecto
r X2/X3

Remarks

W1

X1.2

X2.20

R0

X1.10

X2.36

R4

X1.1

X2.2

X1.9

X2.17

X1.26

X2.21

X1.34

X2.35

X1.25

X2.3

X1.33

X2.16

T0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

T4

318

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Wire

W2

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

5 Cables

Connecto
r X1

Connecto
r X2/X3

Remarks

Connecto
r X1

Connecto
r X2/X3

Remarks

X1.4

X2.22

R1

X1.12

X2.34

R5

X1.3

X2.4

X1.11

X2.15

X1.28

X2.23

X1.36

X2.33

X1.27

X2.5

X1.35

X2.14

X1.6

X2.24

X1.14

X2.32

X1.5

X2.6

X1.13

X2.13

X1.30

X2.25

X1.38

X2.31

X1.29

X2.7

X1.37

X2.12

X1.8

X2.26

X1.16

X2.30

X1.7

X2.8

X1.15

X2.11

X1.32

X2.27

X1.40

X2.29

X1.31

X2.9

X1.39

X2.10

X1.18

X3.20

X1.50

X3.36

X1.17

X3.2

X1.49

X3.17

X1.42

X3.21

X1.74

X3.35

X1.41

X3.3

X1.73

X3.16

X1.20

X3.22

X1.52

X3.34

X1.19

X3.4

X1.51

X3.15

X1.44

X3.23

X1.76

X3.33

X1.43

X3.5

X1.75

X3.14

X1.22

X3.24

X1.54

X3.32

X1.21

X3.6

X1.53

X3.13

X1.46

X3.25

X1.78

X3.31

X1.45

X3.7

X1.77

X3.12

X1.24

X3.26

X1.56

X3.30

X1.23

X3.8

X1.55

X3.11

X1.48

X3.27

X1.80

X3.29

X1.47

X3.9

X1.79

X3.10

Shell

Braid

Shell

Braid

T1

R2

T2

R3

T3

R8

T8

R9

T9

R10

T10

R11

T11

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

T5

R6

T6

R7

T7

R12

T12

R13

T13

R14

T14

R15

T15

319

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

5.8 Orderwire Cable


An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE port on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to
the port of the orderwire phone.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable
1

Main label
6

X1

X2

1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector

Pin Assignments
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable
Connector X1

Connector X2

Function

X1.3

X2.3

Tip

X1.4

X2.4

Ring

5.9 Network Cable


A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs)
and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin
assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-7. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The
pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-8.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

320

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs


Pin

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs


Pin

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B


(+)

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B


(-)

TX+

Transmitting data (+)

BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A


(+)

Reserved

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D


(+)

Reserved

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D


(-)

TX-

Transmitting data (-)

BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A


(-)

Reserved

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C


(+)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

321

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Pin

5 Cables

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

Reserved

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C


(-)

Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used
between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and
crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN
910 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and
crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical
service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Network cable
1

Label 1 Main label

Label 2

1. Network port connector, RJ45

Pin Assignments
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relation

X1.1

X2.1

White/Orange

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.3

X2.3

White/Green

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White/Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White/Brown

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

322

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relation

X1.6

X2.2

Orange

Twisted pair

X1.3

X2.1

White/Orange

X1.1

X2.3

White/Green

X1.2

X2.6

Green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White/Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White/Brown

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

323

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

A Differences Between General-Purpose IF Boards

Differences Between General-Purpose IF


Boards
The general-purpose IF boards used on OptiX RTN NEs provide different functions and features.
The general-purpose IF boards used on OptiX RTN NEs include IFU2, IFX2, ISU2, and ISX2
boards. Table A-1 lists differences between these boards.
NOTE

l IF1 boards are not listed here because they are SDH IF boards.
l In Table A-1, "Y" indicates that the corresponding board supports the specified function, and "N"
indicates that the corresponding board does not support the specified function.

Table A-1 Differences between general-purpose IF boards


Function and Feature

Board
IFU2

Radio
type

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

IFX2

ISU2

ISX
2

Integrated IP
radio

Native E1 + Ethernet

Native STM-1 +
Ethernet

SDH radio

STM-1

2STM-1

Ethernet frame header compression

XPIC

K byte pass-through

PLA

Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

324

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

B Board Loopback Types

Board Loopback Types

Different service interface boards support different loopback types.


Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support
Board

Loopback Type

Remarks

SL1D/SL1DA

l Inloops at optical ports

The SL1D boards described in


this section include the physical
SL1D board and the logical
SL1D board to which the
physical CSTA/CSHC board is
mapped.

l Outloops at optical ports


l Inloops on VC-4 paths
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
SP3S/SP3D/ML1/
MD1/MP1

l Inloops at E1 tributary
ports
l Outloops at E1 tributary
ports

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

EM4T/EM4F/EM6X/
EM6TB

l Inloops at the MAC layer of


Ethernet ports

EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA

l Inloops at the PHY layer of


Ethernet ports

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The SP3S and SP3D boards


described in this section include
the physical SP3S and SP3D
boards and the logical SP3S and
SP3D boards to which the
physical CSTA/CSHA/CHSB/
CHSC board is mapped.
The MP1 board described in this
section refers to the logical MP1
board to which the physical
CSHD board is mapped.
The EM4T/EM4F is the logical
Ethernet board to which the
physical CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
board is mapped. The EM6X is
the logical Ethernet board to
which the physical CSHD board
is mapped. EM6TB is the logical
Ethernet board to which the
physical CSHE board is mapped.

325

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

B Board Loopback Types

Board

Loopback Type

Remarks

EFP8

l Inloops at the PHY layer of


Ethernet ports excluding
ports 9 and 10 (bridging
ports)

l Inloops at the MAC layer of


Ethernet ports excluding
port 10 (bridging port)
l Inloops on VC-12 paths
EMS6

l Inloops at the PHY layer of


Ethernet ports excluding
ports 7 and 8 (bridging
ports)

l Inloops at the MAC layer of


Ethernet ports excluding
port 8 (bridging port)
l Inloops on VC-3 paths
IF1

l Inloops at IF ports

l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports
IFU2/IFX2

l Inloops and outloops at IF


ports

l Inloops and outloops at


multiplexing ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of
IF_ETH ports
ISU2/ISX2

l Inloops and outloops at IF


ports

l Inloops and outloops at


multiplexing ports

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

326

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

C Indicators of Boards

Indicators of Boards

Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSTA
Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on


or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at


100 ms intervals

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

The BOOTROM self-check fails during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

327

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or


loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

SRV

LOS1

LOS2

On (green)

The clock is working properly.

On (red)

The clock source is lost or a clock


switchover occurs.

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

On (red)

The first STM-1 port on the line is


reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The first STM-1 port on the line is free


of R_LOS alarms.

On (red)

The second STM-1 port on the line is


reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The second STM-1 port on the line is free


of R_LOS alarms.

Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHA/CSHB


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

328

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

C Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on


or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at


100 ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or


loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

SRV

On (green)

The clock is working properly.

On (red)

The clock source is lost or a clock


switchover occurs.

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHC

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

329

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on


or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at


100 ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or


loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

SRV

LINK1

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The clock is working properly.

On (red)

The clock source is lost or a clock


switchover occurs.

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

On (green)

The connection at a specific port is


working properly.

Off

The connection at a specific port is


interrupted.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

330

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

C Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

ACT1

On or blinking (yellow)

Data is being transmitted or received.

Off

No data is being transmitted or received.

On (green)

The port connection is normal.

Off

The port connection is interrupted.

On or blinking (yellow)

Data is being transmitted or received.

Off

No data is being transmitted or received.

On (red)

The first port on the line is reporting the


R_LOS alarm.

Off

The first port on the line is free of R_LOS


alarms.

On (red)

The second port on the line is reporting


the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The second port on the line is free of


R_LOS alarms.

LINK2

ACT2

LOS1

LOS2

Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHD/CSHE


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on


or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

331

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

Blinks on (red) and off at


100 ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or


loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

SRV

LINK1a

ACT1a

LINK2a

ACT2a

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The clock is working properly.

On (red)

The clock source is lost or a clock


switchover occurs.

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

On (green)

The connection at the GE1 port is


working properly.

Off

The connection at the GE1 port is


interrupted.

On or blinking (yellow)

Data is being transmitted or received at


the GE1 port.

Off

No data is being transmitted or received


at the GE1 port.

On (green)

The connection at the GE2 port is


working properly.

Off

The connection at the GE2 port is


interrupted.

On or blinking (yellow)

Data is being transmitted or received at


the GE2 port.

Off

No data is being transmitted or received


at the GE2 port.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

332

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

C Indicators of Boards

NOTE

a: The LINK1, LINK2, ACT1, and ACT2 indicators are available only on the CSHD and indicate optical
port status.

Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working


properly.

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting


critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

RMT

ACT

On (yellow)

The ODU is reporting minor


alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at


300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is


reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free


of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

333

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

C Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the


services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working properly.

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting critical or major


alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

RMT

ACT

On (yellow)

The ODU is reporting minor alarms.

Blinks on (yellow)
and off at 300 ms
intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board


works as the active one.
l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

334

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board


works as the standby one.
l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working


properly.

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting


critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

RMT

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (yellow)

The ODU is reporting minor


alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at


300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is


reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free


of defects.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

335

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

C Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

ACT

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2


Indicator

State

Meaning

XPIC

On (green)

The XPIC input signal is


normal.

On (red)

The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off

The XPIC function is


disabled.

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.

STAT

l The board is not created.


l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV

LINK

ODU

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working


properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

336

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting


critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

RMT

ACT

On (yellow)

The ODU is reporting minor


alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at


300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is


reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free


of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2


Indicator

State

Meaning

XPIC

On (green)

The XPIC input signal is


normal.

On (red)

The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off

The XPIC function is


disabled.

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.

STAT

l The board is not created.


l There is no power
supplied to the board.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

337

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

C Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

SRV

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working


properly.

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting


critical or major alarms.

LINK

ODU

l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

RMT

ACT

On (yellow)

The ODU is reporting minor


alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at


300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is


reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free


of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system,


the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
standby one.

Off

l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

338

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV

PROG

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on or


being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100


ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the


power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or loading


upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

LINK1a

LINK2a

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The GE1 port is connected correctly and is


not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (green)

The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE1 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

On (green)

The GE2 port is connected correctly and is


not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (green)

The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

339

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

Off

The GE2 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.

Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV

PROG

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on or


being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100


ms intervals

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the


power-on or resetting process of the board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

340

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)

The memory self-check fails or loading


upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.

L/A1a

L/A2a

On (green)

The GE1 port is connected correctly and is


not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow)

The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE1 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

On (green)

The GE2 port is connected correctly and is


not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow)

The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE2 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

NOTE

a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.

Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

341

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

On (green)

l The upper layer software is being


initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100


ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the


power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or loading


upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SRV

LINK1

ACT1

LINK2

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The system is working normally.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

On (green)

The GE1 port is connected correctly.

Blinks on (red) and off at 300


ms intervals

The receive optical power at the GE1 optical


port is higher than the upper threshold.

Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700


ms off

The receive optical power at the GE1 optical


port is lower than the lower threshold.

Off

The GE1 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

Blinking (yellow)

The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE1 port is not receiving or


transmitting data.

On (green)

The GE2 port is connected correctly.

Blinks on (red) and off at 300


ms intervals

The receive optical power at the GE2 optical


port is higher than the upper threshold.

Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700


ms off

The receive optical power at the GE2 optical


port is lower than the lower threshold.

Off

The GE1 port is not connected or is


connected incorrectly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

342

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

C Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

ACT2

Blinking (yellow)

The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting


data.

Off

The GE2 port is not receiving or


transmitting data.

Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at


100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board during


the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at


300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot state


during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on or


being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100


ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the


power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or loading


upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SRV

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the


system.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

343

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.

Table C-14 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

LOS1

LOS2

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

Off

The services are not


configured.

On (red)

The first port of the SL1D/


SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.

Off

The first port of the SL1D/


SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.

On (red)

The second port of the


SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The second port of the


SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.

Table C-15 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

344

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

C Indicators of Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

Off

The services are not


configured.

Table C-16 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1


Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working


properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.

Off

l The board is not working.


l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm


occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm


occurs in the services.

Off

The services are not


configured.

Table C-17 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicator

Status

Description

PWRA

On (green)

The power supply is connected.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

345

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

PWRB

C Indicators of Boards

Status

Description

Off

There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power


supply is connected incorrectly.

On (green)

The power supply is connected.

Off

There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power


supply is connected incorrectly.

Table C-18 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

FAN

On (green)

The fan is working properly.

On (red)

The fan is faulty.

Off

The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

346

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Weight and Power Consumption of Each


Board

Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board


Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board
Board

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Weight (kg)

Power Consumption (W)

CSTA

1.08 kg

< 13.6 W

CSHA

1.11 kg

< 18.0 W

CSHB

1.16 kg

< 22.7 W

CSHC

1.13 kg

< 19.6 W

CSHD

1.00 kg

< 32.2 W

CSHE

1.00 kg

< 31.7 W

IF1

0.72 kg

< 12.0 W

IFU2

0.79 kg

< 23.0 W

IFX2

0.80 kg

< 33.0 W

ISU2

0.60 kg

< 22.0 W

ISX2

0.60 kg

< 23.0 W

EM6T

0.37 kg

< 10.4 W

EM6TA

0.40 kg

< 16.2 W

EM6F

0.40 kg

< 11.3 W

EM6FA

0.40 kg

< 15.4 W

EMS6

0.50 kg

< 16.5 W

EFP8

0.60 kg

< 13.5 W

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

347

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Board

D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Weight (kg)

Power Consumption (W)

SL1D

0.30 kg

< 3.4 W

SL1DA

0.30 kg

< 3.3 W

ML1

0.45 kg

< 7.0 W

MD1

0.50 kg

< 12.2 W

SP3S

0.50 kg(VER.B)

< 5.7 W(VER.B)

0.40 kg(VER.C)

< 4.8 W(VER.C)

0.64 kg(VER.B)

< 9.6 W(VER.B)

0.54 kg(VER.C)

< 8.3 W(VER.C)

PIU

0.12 kg

< 0.5 W

FAN

0.20 kg

< 2.3 W (room temperature)

SP3D

< 17 W (high temperature)


Empty chassis
(with only the
backplane)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

2.36 kg

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

348

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters used in this document.


E.1 Parameters for Network Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
E.2 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
E.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
E.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
E.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
E.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the
packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
E.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/
EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet
port parameters, and QoS parameters.
E.8 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
E.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
E.10 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
E.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

349

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

E.1 Parameters for Network Management


This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.

E.1.1 Parameters for NE Management


This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).

E.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching


This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

350

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters for the Search Field


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Address Type

IP Address of GNE

IP Address Range of GNE

l If the OSI protocol is


used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on NSAP
Address only.

NSAP Address
IP Address Range of GNE

l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address
of GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

351

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Search Address

l If Address Type is set


to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
l If Address Type is set
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP
address of the gateway
NE.

User Name

This parameter specifies


the user name of the
gateway NE.

Password

This parameter specifies


the password of the
gateway NE.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

352

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter for Searching for NEs


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Create NE after search

Selected

Deselected

l To create NEs in
batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE
after search. The NEs
are automatically
created after they are
found.

Deselected

l After Create NE after


search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are
used for creating an
NE.
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.

NE User

l This parameter
specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.

Password

l This parameter
specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

353

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Upload after create

Selected

Deselected

l This parameter
specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.

Deselected

l If only Upload after


create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.

Parameter for the Found NEs


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE ID

This parameter indicates


the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.

GNE Address

This parameter indicates


the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.

GNE ID

This parameter indicates


the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.

Created As GNE

Yes

Yes

l This parameter
specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.

No

l This parameter is valid


only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Connection Mode

Common

Common

The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.

1400

This parameter specifies


the communication port.

Security SSL

Port

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

354

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Status

Created

This parameter indicates


whether the found NE is
created.

Uncreated

E.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation


This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.

Navigation Path
1.

Choose File > Creat > NE from the Main Menu.

2.

Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Type

This parameter indicates


the type of the NE to be
created.

ID

1 to 49151

l The ID refers to the


basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
l The NE ID consisting
of the basic ID and
extended ID identifies
an NE on the NMS.

Extended ID

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

1 to 254

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

If the number of existing


NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
Extended ID.

355

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Name

l This parameter
specifies the name of
the NE.
l After you have
specified the name of
the NE, the name is
displayed under the
icon of the NE.

Remarks

This parameter specifies


the remarks of the NE.

Gateway Type

Non-Gateway

Non-Gateway

l This parameter is set to


Gateway if the new
NE is a gateway NE.

Gateway

l This parameter is set to


Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a nongateway NE.
l This parameter is set
according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a nongateway NE.
Gateway

This parameter indicates


the gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.

Protocol

IP

IP

l This parameter needs


to be set when
Gateway Type is set
to Gateway.

OSI

l When the OSI over


DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
l In other cases, this
parameter is set to IP.
IP Address

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

This parameter indicates


the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.

356

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Connection Mode

Common

Common

The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.

Security SSL

Port

1400

This parameter specifies


the communication port.

NE User

This parameter specifies


the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.

Password

This parameter specifies


the password to be entered
when an NE is created.

NSAP Address

This parameter indicates


the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.

E.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs


This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path
1.

In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed.

2.

Choose Object Attributes.

3.

Click Modify NE ID.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

357

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters for Changing NE IDs


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

New ID

l The new ID refers to


the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
network plan.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.

1 to 254

New Extended ID

If the number of existing


NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.

E.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization


This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path
1.

Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from


the Main Menu.

2.

Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Parameters for NE Time Synchronization


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Name

This parameter indicates


the name of the NE.

NE ID

This parameter indicates


the ID of the NE.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

358

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Synchronous Mode

Standard NTP

Null

l If this parameter is set


to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
of the NMS server.

NM
Null

l If this parameter is set


to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.
Standard NTP
Authentication

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter is valid


only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.

Disabled

Parameters for the Standard NTP Server


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Standard NTP Server


Identifier

NE ID

NE ID

l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to IP.

IP

l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the HWECC
protocol, this
parameter is set to NE
ID.
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the IP
protocol, this
parameter is set to IP.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

359

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Standard NTP Server

l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE,
this parameter is set to
the ID or IP address of
the gateway NE.

Standard NTP Server


Key

0 to 1024

l If the NTP server does


not need to
authenticated, this
parameter is set to the
value "0".
l If the NTP server
needs to be
authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according
to the allocated key of
the NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).

Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Start Time

l This parameter
specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

360

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

DST

Selected

Deselected

l This parameter
indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.

Deselected

l This parameter is set


according to the actual
situation.
Synchronization Period
(days)

1 to 300

l This parameter
indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.

l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.

E.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time


This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.

Navigation Path
1.

Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization


Management from the Main Menu.

2.

Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
.

Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

This parameter indicates the name of the


NE.

TimeZone

This parameter indicates the time zone.

DST

This parameter indicates whether DST is


enabled.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

361

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters for Time Zone


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Time Zone

l After the time zone is changed, the


current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
l This parameter is set according to the
place where the NE is located.

DST

Selected

Deselected

Deselected

l The parameters related to daylight


saving time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.
l This parameter is set according to the
situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.

1 to 120

Offset

This parameter specifies the offset value of


the daylight saving time.

WEEK

This parameter specifies the method of


adjusting the daylight saving time.

Unit: minute(s)
Start Rule

WEEK
DATE

Start Time

This parameter specifies the start daylight


saving time.

End Rule

WEEK

WEEK

This parameter specifies the method of


adjusting the daylight saving time.

This parameter specifies the end daylight


saving time.

DATE
End Time

E.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management


This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.

Navigation Path
1.

Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from


the Main Menu.

2.

Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

362

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Key

1 to 1024

l This parameter
indicates the key for
NTP authentication.
l This parameter is set
according to the
requirements of the
external NTP server.

Password

l This parameter
indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.
l This parameter is set
according to the
requirements of the
external NTP server.

Yes

Trusted

Yes

No

l When this parameter is


set to No, the key
verification is not
trusted. After
receiving the key, the
NE rejects the clock
synchronization
service.
l When this parameter is
set to Yes, the key
verification is trusted.
After receiving the
key, the NE provides
the clock
synchronization
service.
l After receiving an
unknown or incorrect
key, the NE rejects the
clock synchronization
service. Hence, it is
recommended that you
set a trusted key only.

E.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management


This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

363

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the License Management tab.

Parameters for Managing Licenses


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

This parameter displays the boards that need


to be supported by licenses.

License File Type

This parameter displays the license type


corresponding to each board.

Capability

This parameter displays the Capability of


each board.

Loaded

This parameter displays whether the


corresponding license file is loaded to each
board.

E.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs


This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.

Navigation Path
1.

On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.

2.

Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
.

then click

Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Name

This parameter indicates the name of the


NE.

NE Type

OptiX RTN 910

This parameter indicates the type of the NE.

Operation Type

This parameter indicates the type of the


operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.

Auto Disabling

Disabled

Enabled

This parameter specifies whether to


automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

Enabled

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

364

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Auto Disabling
Time(min)

1 to 2880

This parameter specifies the time of


automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

E.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management


This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

E.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting


This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication Setting


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP Address

Before delivery, the


IP address of the NE
is set to 129.9.0.x.
The letter x indicates
the basic ID.

Gateway IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0

In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set


according to the following rules:
l The IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway of the gateway NE should meet
the planning requirements of the
external DCN.
l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
address must be in the same network
segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be
set according to the NE ID. In this case,
the IP address of an NE should be set in
the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is,
if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address
should be set to 129.9.0.1.

Extended ID

1 to 254

l Do not change the extended ID when the


number of actual NEs does not exceed
the range permitted by the basic NE ID.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

365

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NSAP Address

This parameter is valid only when the OSI


over DCC solution is applied. This
parameter is used to set only the area ID of
an NSAP address. The other parts of the
NSAP address are automatically generated
by the NE.

Connection Mode

Common + Security
SSL

Common + Security
SSL

l Specifies the connection mode that the


gateway NE allows the NMS to use for
connecting to the gateway NE.

Common
Security SSL

l If the gateway NE has no special


security requirement for connection to
the NMS, Connection Mode can be set
to Common.
l If the gateway NE requests secure
connection to the NMS for preventing
information interception and cracking,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Security SSL.
l If NE communication security level
needs to be the same as NMS
communication security level,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Common + Security SSL.
l The default parameter value is
recommended unless the gateway NE
requires that the NMS use the SSL
connection mode.
l The parameter value takes effect only
when it is set for a gateway NE and the
gateway NE is connected to the NMS by
means of the IP protocol.

E.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration


This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

366

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

This parameter indicates the port that is


connected to the DCC channel.

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

It is recommended that you use the default


value, except for the following cases:

Disabled

l If the port is connected to the other ECC


subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
Channel

D1-D3
D4-D12
D1-D12
D1-D1

D1-D1 (for the PDH


radio whose
transmission
capacity is less than
16xE1)
D1-D3 (for other
cases)

It is recommended that you use the default


value, except for the following cases:
l If the IP DCN or OSI over DCC solution
is adopted, Channel for the SDH line
ports is set to a value that is the same as
the value for third-party network.
l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of
Channel for the SDH line ports should
not conflict with the value that is set for
the third-party network.

DCC Resources

This parameter indicates the DCC


resources.

Communication
Status

This parameter indicates the


communication status.

Protocol Type

HWECC

HWECC

It is recommended that you use the default


value, except for the following cases:

TCP/IP

l If the IP DCN solution is adopted,


Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.

OSI
L2DCN

l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,


Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l When the L2 DCN solution is used, set
Protocol Type to L2DCN.

IP Address

l IP Address is available only if Protocol


Type is set to TCP/IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the interface IP
address of the non-backbone area port on
the ABR.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

367

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Subnet Mask

l Subnet Mask is available only if


Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the subnet mask of
the non-backbone area port on the ABR.

E.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission


Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.

3.

Click Create.

Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source Timeslot/
Porta

This parameter specifies the source timeslot


or port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

368

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Source Port

D1

l Only one overhead byte can be selected


each time.

D2

l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the


customized overhead bytes that are used
for transmitting asynchronous data
services.

D3
D4
D5
D6

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that


is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
channel.

D7
D8
D9

NOTE
Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports
transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.

D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
Sink Timeslot/
Porta

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or


port.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

369

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Sink Port

D1

l Only one overhead byte can be selected


each time.

D2

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that


is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
channel.

D3
D4
D5
D6

l Generally, Transparent Transmission


of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
set to a value that is the same as or
different from the value in the case of
Transparent Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at Source Port.

D7
D8
D9
D10

NOTE
Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports
transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.

D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4

NOTE

a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.

E.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.

Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ECC Extended
Mode

Auto mode

Auto mode

It is recommended that you use the default


value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Specified mode

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

370

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters for Setting the Server


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP

This parameter indicates the IP address of


the server.

Port

1601 to 1699

l This parameter is valid only when ECC


Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the NMS functions as the
server.
l This parameter can be set to any value
from 1601 to 1699.

Parameters for Setting the Client


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Opposite IP

0.0.0.0

Port

1601 to 1699

l This parameter is valid only when ECC


Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the client of the
extended ECC. Except for the NE that
functions as the server, all other NEs that
use the extended ECC can function as the
client.
l Opposite IP and Port are respectively
set to the IP address of the server NE and
the specified port number.

E.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management


This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

371

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter for NE ECC Link Management


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Destination NE

This parameter specifies the sink NE of the


ECC connection.

Transfer NE

This parameter specifies the next transfer


NE and the direction of the ECC route.

Distance

l This parameter specifies the number of


NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route
passes, namely, the number of ECC
packet forwarding attempts. The value
can be set to a value that is greater than
the number of actual ECC packet
forwarding attempts. If the value is set to
a value that is less than the number of
actual ECC packet forwarding attempts,
however, the destination NE fails to be
accessed.
l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the
source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.

Level

l This parameter indicates that multiple


ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
l If the ECC route is generated
automatically, the priority is 4.
l If the ECC route is added manually, the
priority is 5.

Mode

This parameter indicates the ECC routing


mode.

SCC No.

This parameter specifies the physical port


through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.

E.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test


This topic describes the parameters that are used to test ECC availability.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

372

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.

Ping Test Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Target NE

Specifies the NE for which a ping test will


be performed.

Packet Length
(Byte)

0-800

64

l Specifies the test packet length.

Packet Quantity

1-65535

l It is recommended that this parameter


take its default value.
3

l Specifies the number of test packets.


l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.

Sending Interval
(ms)

0-65535

l Specifies the test packet transmission


interval.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.

To Be Translated
(ms)

1-65535

1000

l Specifies the maximum time for test


packet to wait until being responded to.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.

Traceroute Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Target NE

Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test


will be performed.

To Be Translated
(ms)

0-65535

1000

l Specifies the maximum time for test


packet to wait until being responded to.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.

Forwarding NEs

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

0-255

64

Specifies the number of NEs that test


packets will traverse during the forwarding
process.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

373

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

E.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route


Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IP Route Management tab.

Parameters for IP Route Management


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Destination
Address

This parameter indicates the destination


address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.

Subnet Mask

This parameter indicates the subnet mask of


the destination address of the packets.

Gateway

This parameter indicates the IP address of


the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.

Protocol

l DIRECT: indicates the route between


the local NE and an adjacent NE.
l STATIC: indicates the route that is
created manually.
l OSPF: indicates the route between the
local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
l RIP: indicates the route that is
discovered by the routing information
protocol.
l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is in a not so
stubby area (NSSA).
l A route can be deleted in the case of
STATIC only, but cannot be edited in
the other cases.
l Compared with a dynamic route, a static
route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

374

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Interface

This parameter indicates the interface that is


used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.

Metric

This parameter indicates the maximum


number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Metric is used to
indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.

E.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route


Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IP Route Management tab.

3.

Click New.

Parameters for Creating IP Routes


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Destination
Address

This parameter specifies the destination


address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.

Subnet Mask

This parameter indicates the subnet mask of


the destination address of the packets.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

375

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Gateway

This parameter specifies the IP address of


the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.

E.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test


This topic describes the parameters that are used to test IP DCN availability.

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.

Ping Test Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Target NE IP

Specifies the NE for which a ping test will


be performed.

Packet Length
(Byte)

0-800

64

l Specifies the test packet length.

Packet Quantity

1-65535

l It is recommended that this parameter


take its default value.
3

l Specifies the number of test packets.


l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.

Sending Interval
(ms)

0-65535

l Specifies the test packet transmission


interval.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.

To Be Translated
(ms)

1-65535

5000

l Specifies the maximum time for test


packet to wait until being responded to.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.

Traceroute Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Target NE IP

Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test


will be performed.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

376

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Max Hops

1-30

10

Specifies the number of hops which test


packets traverse during the packet
transmission process.

E.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter


Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

OSPF Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Area

0.0.0.0

l If only an OSPF area is configured on an


NE, set this parameter according to the
planning information.
l If multiple OSPF areas are configured on
an NE, this parameter takes its default
value 0.0.0.0.

DCC Hello Timer


(s)

1 to 255

10

l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello


packet timer for the DCC channel or
inband DCN.
l The Hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

377

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

DCC Neighbor
Dead Time(s)

1 to 65535

40

l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies


the dead time of a neighbor router for the
DCC channel or inband DCN.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should
be set to a value that is a minimum of
twice the value of DCC Hello Timer
(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.

DCC
Retransmission
Timer(s)

1 to 65535

l DCC Retransmission Timer(s)


specifies the interval for transmitting a
request through the DCC channel or
inband DCN to retransmit the link state
advertisement (LSA) packets.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.

DCC Delay(s)

1 to 3600

l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time


to transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC channel or inband DCN.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
DCC Delay(s).
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

378

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAN Hello Timer


(s)

1 to 255

10

l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello


packet timer at the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.

LAN Neighbor
Dead Time(s)

1 to 65535

40

l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies


the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

379

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAN
Retransmission
Timer(s)

1 to 65535

l LAN Retransmission Timer(s)


specifies the time for transmitting a
request for retransmission of the LSA
packets through the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.

LAN Delay(s)

1 to 3600

l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time


to transmit the LSA packets through the
Ethernet network management port or
NE cascading port.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
LAN Delay(s).
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.

OSPF Status

Enabled

Enabled

Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is


enabled. If an NE uses only static routes
with OSPF disabled, set this parameter to
Disabled.

Disabled

l Specifies whether to enable the STUB


Area.

Disabled

STUB Area

Enabled
Disabled

l Set this parameter as required.


l A backbone area cannot be a STUB area.
NSSA Area

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA


Area.
l Set this parameter as required.
l A backbone area cannot be an NSSA
area.

Direct route

Enabled
Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the direct route


automatic flooding function is enabled.
l Direct route: the route detected by the
link layer protocol.
l Set this parameter as required.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

380

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Static route

Enabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the static route


automatic flooding function is enabled.

Disabled

l Static route: the route manually


configured by the network
administrator.
l Set this parameter as required.
RIP route

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the RIP route


automatic flooding function is enabled.
l RIP route: the route detected by the RIP
protocol.
l Set this parameter as required.

Default route

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the default route


automatic flooding function is enabled
for ASBRs.
l Default OSPF routes are routes whose
destination addresses and subnet masks
are 0s.
l Set this parameter according to the
planning information.

Router ID

The Router IP address is always the NE IP


address.

Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port

Enabled

Enabled

l Specifies whether the Ethernet network


management port or NE cascading port
transmits Type-10 LSAs.

Disabled

l If this parameter is set to Disabled, the


Ethernet network management port or
NE cascading port transmits network
management information.
l Set this parameter as required.
LAN Interface

Enabled
Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is


enabled for the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
OSPF protocol is communicated with
other equipment through the Ethernet
network management port or NE
cascading port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

381

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

OSPF authentication parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Interface Type

l Displays the DCN port types that allow


the OSPF authentication key to be
specified.
l LAN indicates the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l DCC indicates the DCC channels or
inband DCN port.

none

Authentication
Type

none

MD5

l Specifies the OSPF authentication mode


for which a key needs to be set.
l If Authentication Type is MD5, a key
needs to be set for the MD5
authentication mode.

simple

l If Authentication Type is simple, a key


needs to be set for the simple
authentication mode.
l If Authentication Type is none, all
preset keys for the related port type are
cleared.
Authentication
Password

Specifies the OSPF authentication password


for each port type.

MD5 Key

1-255

MD5 Key is available only when


Authentication Type is MD5.

E.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP


This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Proxy ARP tab.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

382

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Proxy ARP

Disabled

Disabled

l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the


same network segment but different
domains to communicate with each
other.

Enabled

l To realize communication between such


NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns an ARP spoofing packet, which
enables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC
address of the destination NE. In this
manner, the packet that is to be sent to
the destination NE is first sent to the NE
with the proxy ARP function enabled
and then forwarded to the destination
NE.

E.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas


This topic describes the parameters that are related to management of multiple OSPF areas.

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Multi-area OSPF Management tab.

Parameters Required for Configuring Multiple OSPF Areas


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ID

Displays the area ID.

Default Area

Displays whether an area is the default area.

Authentication
Type

none

none

MD5

l Specifies the OSPF authentication type


used by an area.

simple

l none indicates no authentication.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

383

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Automatic Route
Aggregation

Enabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether automatic route


aggregation is enabled for an area.

Disabled

l The number of routes after automatic


route aggregation is the same as the
number of Networks.
Stub Type

Displays the STUB type of an area.

Network Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP Address

Displays the IP addresses of the Networks


in an area.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet masks of the Networks


in an area.

Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP Address

Displays the IP address of the Network


where route aggregation is manually
enabled.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask of the Network


where route aggregation is manually
enabled.

E.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding


OSPF Areas
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding OSFP areas.

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Multi-area OSPF Management tab.

3.

Click New.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

384

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters Required for Creating OSPF Areas


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ID

l Set the area ID of a new OSPF area


according to the planning information.
l An NE can be configured with a
maximum of four OSPF areas.

IP Address

l Set the IP addresses of the Networks in


an area according to planning
information.
l An area supports a maximum of four
Networks.

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet masks of the Networks in an


area according to planning information. A
subnet mask can contain a maximum of 30
bits.

Authentication
Type

none

none

Specifies the OSPF authentication type used


by an area according to planning
information.

MD5
simple

l none indicates no authentication.


l MD5 indicates that authentication is
performed based on the preset password,
with the password encrypted in MD5
mode.
l simple: indicates that authentication is
performed based on the preset password,
with the password not encrypted.

Enabled

Automatic Route
Aggregation

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether automatic route


aggregation is enabled for an area.
l The number of routes after automatic
route aggregation is the same as the
number of Networks.

Stub Type

NON-STUB
STUB
NSSA

NON-STUB

Set the STUB type of an area according to


planning information.
l For the backbone area, this parameter
must be set to NON-STUB.
l For other areas, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to NON-STUB. If
required, this parameter can also be set
to STUB or NSSA.

E.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding


Routes to Be Manually Aggregated
This topic describes the parameters for adding routes to be manually aggregated.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

385

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab.

3.

In Manual Route Aggregation, click Add.

Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the Network


where routes need to be aggregated
manually.

Subnet Mask

Specifies the subnet mask of the Network


where routes need to be aggregated
manually.

E.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting


This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

Port OSPF Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

Displays the ports that allow OSPF


parameters to be set.

Path Type

Displays the current DCC channel type.

OSPF Status

Enabled

Enabled

l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.


l Set this parameter as required.

Disabled
Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port

Enabled
Disabled

Enabled

l Specifies whether DCC channels support


Opaque LSAs.
l Set this parameter as required.

E.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

386

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.

Network Layer Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

This parameter indicates the name of the


NE.

Configuration Role

ES

L1

l An NE whose Configuration Role is set


to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area. It uses a route in the
local area only and accesses the other
area by distributing the default route of
the nearest L2 NE.

L1
L2

l An NE whose Configuration Role is set


to L2 can function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area and can use a route
in the backbone area. The backbone area
is a collection that is formed by
consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE
of all the roles must be consecutive
(connected to each other).
NOTE
Configuration Role cannot be set to ES.

Current Role

This parameter indicates the current role.

E.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table


This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Routing Table tab.

Parameters for Link Adjacency Table


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

This parameter indicates the port used for


OSI communication.

Data Link Layer

This parameter indicates the protocol that is


used at the data link layer.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

387

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Adjacency No.

l This parameter specifies the identifier of


the adjacency that is set up by two NEs
through the OSI protocol. One adjacency
number corresponds to an OSI
adjacency.
l The value is dynamically allocated by
the NE.

Adjacency Type

This parameter indicates the type of the


adjacency.

Adjacency State

This parameter indicates the state of the


adjacency.

Peer End Area ID

This parameter indicates the area ID that is


contained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.

Peer End System


ID

This parameter indicates the system ID of


the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.

Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Destination SYSID

This parameter indicates the system ID of


the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.

Metric

This parameter indicates the number of hops


that reach the destination NE or destination
area.

Adjacency No.1

This parameter indicates the number of the


adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.

Adjacency No.2

This parameter indicates the number of the


adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.

E.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

388

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the OSI Tunnel tab.

Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Remote IP Address

This parameter indicates the IP address of


the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

LAPD Actor

User

User

l This parameter specifies the LAPD


actor.

Network

l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,


they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Efficient LAPD
Enable

This parameter indicates whether the


current LAPD is enabled.

Configurable
LAPD Enable

Enabled

Enabled

This parameter specifies whether the LAPD


is enabled.

Disabled

LAPD Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Remote IP Address

This parameter indicates the IP address of


the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

L2 Wait Time to
Retry(s)

1 to 20

l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time


to Retry(s).
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the
interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be
set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

389

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

L2 Retry Times

2 to 6

l This parameter specifies L2 Retry


Times.
l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum
number of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
l L2 Retry Times needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.

L3 Hello Timer(s)

1 to 100

l This parameter specifies L3 Hello


Timer(s).
l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello
packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
l The Hello timer determines the interval
for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

390

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

L3 ES Timer(s)

1 to 200

50

l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer


(s).
l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L3 ES
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.

L3 IS Timer(s)

1 to 200

10

l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer


(s).
l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network
is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can
be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

391

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

L3 Hold Timer(s)

2 to 63

l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer


(s).
l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold
timer at the LAPD link network layer.
l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.

1 to 63

COST

20

l This parameter specifies COST.


l COST indicates the overhead value of
the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
l The overhead value determines whether
this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
l This parameter needs to set according to
the planning information.

E.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters


This topic describes the OSI port parameters.

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose
Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Port Parameters tab.

OSI port parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAPD Role

User

User

l This parameter is available only when


Protocol Type is OSI.

Network

l Set LAPD Role to User at one end of a


DCC and to Network at the other end of
the DCC.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

392

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAPD MTU

This parameter displays the maximum


LAPD packet length.

E.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management


This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Bandwidth Management tab.

Parameters for Bandwidth Management


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Ethernet Board
VLAN ID

2 to 4094

4094

l The equipment on the traditional DCN


can be connected to the NMS through the
SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 910 can
also be connected to the NMS through an
Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is
used to carry the network management
information, the NE differentiates the
network management information and
Ethernet service information according
to the VLAN ID.
l If the default VLAN ID of the inband
DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the
service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID
of the inband DCN can be changed
manually. The same VLAN ID must be,
however, is used on the network-wide
inband DCN.

Bandwidth(Kbit/s)

64 to 1000

512

Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth


for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet
link.

E1 Port
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)

The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this


parameter.

Tunnel Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)

The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this


parameter.

IF Port Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)

64 to 1000

512

IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the


bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on
the radio link.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

393

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

E.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting


This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Port Settings tab.

Parameters for Setting Ports


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Name

This parameter indicates the port name.

Enabled Status

Enabled

Enabled

l Enabled Status specifies the enabling


status of the port.

Disabled

l The network management information


can be transmitted over the inband DCN
when the DCN function is enabled for
the ports at both ends of a link.
IP

Protocol Type

IP

HWECC

l If Protocol Type is set to different


values for two interconnected sets of
equipment, equipment interconnection
fails. Therefore, set Protocol Type to the
same value for both ends of a link.

L2DCN

IP Address

l Specifies the DCN protocol used by the


inband DCN.

l This parameter is available only when


Protocol Type is set to IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the interface IP
address of the non-backbone area port on
the ABR.

Subnet Mask

l This parameter is available only when


Protocol Type is set to IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the subnet mask of
the non-backbone area port on the ABR.

E.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control


This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

394

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Navigation Path
l

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.

Click the Access Control tab.

Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Name

Displays the Ethernet ports that support this


function.

Enabled Status

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies the enabling status of the port.

Enabled

l If the Enabled Status is set to


Enabled, this port can be used to support
access of the management information
from the NMS.
l If the Enabled Status is set to
Disabled, this port cannot be used to
support access of the management
information from the NMS.

IP Address

0.0.0.0

Specifies the IP address of the port.

Subnet Mask

0.0.0.0

Specifies the submask of the port.

E.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control


This topic describes the parameters for controlling the priority of inband DCN packets.

Navigation Path
l

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.

Click the Packet Control tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Packet Type

Displays the packet type for which the


packet priority can be manually specified.

Supported
Application

This parameter cannot be specified


manually.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

395

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Packet Priority

CS6

CS6 (Packet Type


is VLAN)

Specifies the PHB service class of inband


DCN packets.

EF

BE (Packet Type is
DSCP)

AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE

E.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management


This section describes the parameters that are related to L2 DCN management.

Navigation Path
l

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > L2DCN Management from the Function Tree.

Click Query.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Config Status

Auto

Auto

When the OptiX RTN 910 uses the L2 DCN


solution, the RSTP protocol can be used to
prevent L2 forwarding loops. It is
recommended that the RSTP protocol uses
its default enable/disable mode Auto for the
OptiX RTN 910 NE level. That is, the RSTP
protocol is automatically enabled/disabled
depending on the enable/disable status of
the L2 DCN function over IF ports.

l Real Status is queried to be Disabled in


the following scenarios:

Disabled

Real Status

Disabled
Enabled

Config Status is set to Disabled.


When Config Status is set to Auto,
the L2 DCN function is disabled for
all IF ports on the NE.
l When Config Status is set to Auto, the
L2 DCN function is enabled for at least
one IF port on the NE. In this case, the
RSTP protocol will automatically work.
At this time, the queried Real Status is
Enabled.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

396

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

E.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control


This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.

Parameters for Ethernet Access Control


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable Ethernet
Access

Selected

After The First Network Port is set to


Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.

PORT

This parameter displays the NMS port and


the NE cascading port on the system control,
switching, and timing board.

Work Mode

adapt

This parameter specifies the working modes


of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
board.

This parameter displays the working modes


of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
board.

Deselected

10M Half_Duplex
10M Full_Duplex
100M Half_Duplex
100M Full_Duplex
Actual Work Mode

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled

Specifies whether the Ethernet network


management port or NE cascading port is
enabled.

Disabled

Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable Serial Port


Access

Selected

Selected

After Enable Serial Port Access is


selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.

Access Command
Line

Selected

Deselected

If Access Command Line is selected, the


serial interface can be used to access the
command line terminal.

Access NM

Selected

Deselected

If Access NM is selected, the serial interface


can be used to access the NMS.

Deselected

Deselected

Deselected

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

397

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Baud Rate

1200

9600

l This parameter specifies the data


transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.

2400
4800

l This parameter is set according to the


rate of the serial port at the opposite end,
and the rates at both ends must be the
same.

9600
19200
38400
57600
115200

E.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management


This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.

E.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management


This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.

2.

Close the dialog box.

Parameters for NE user management


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

Displays the current NE


name.

NE User

Displays the registered NE


user name.

User Level

Displays the registered NE


user level.

NE User Flag

Displays whether a
registered NE user is
logged in.

Login Allowed

Displays whether a
registered NE user is
allowed to log in to the
NE.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

398

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

Parameter

Value Range

E Parameters Description

Default Value

Description

Log Out User After(min)

Displays the period to wait


until a user automatically
logs out of an NE.

User Valid Days

Displays the active period


of a registered account.

Password Valid Days

Displays the active period


of a registered user
password.

E.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation


This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful.

2.

Close the dialog box.

3.

Click Add.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE User

Specifies the name of a


registered NE user.
NOTE
The name of an NE cannot
contain any space or
Chinese characters.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

399

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

User Level

Monitor Level

Monitor Level

l A Debug Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities, and has the
right to run debugging
commands.

Operation Level
Maintenance Level
System Level
Debug Level

l A System Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities.
l A Maintenance
Level NE user has
some security
authorities, some
configuration
authorities, the
communication setting
authority, and the log
management
authority.
l An Operation Level
NE user has all fault
performance
authorities, some
security authorities,
and some
configuration
authorities.
l A Monitor Level NE
user has the right to use
all query commands, to
log in, to log out, and to
change its own
password.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

400

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE User Flag

LCT NE User

LCT NE User

l Specifies the NE user


flag.

EMS NE User

l LCT NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the U2000 Local Craft
Terminal (U2000
LCT).

CMD NE User
General NE User

l EMS NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the U2000.
l CMD NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the CMD.
l General NE User
indicates NE users for
all NMS types.
Detailed Description

Describes a configured
NE user.

New Password

l Specifies the password


for a new NE user.

Confirm Password

Enter the same value as


New Password.

Whether the password is


allowed to be modified
immediately

Yes

Yes

Specifies whether the


password of a registered
NE user can be changed.

No

E.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control


This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Control from the Function Tree.

Parameters for LCT Access Control


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

This parameter indicates the name of the


NE.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

401

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LCT Access
Control Switch

Access Allowed

Access Allowed

l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this


case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE does not
check the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.

Disable Access

l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In


this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.

E.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation


This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS configuration.

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE
RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Function

Server ID

Server Type

Specifies the desired RADIUS function, the


authentication server ID, and the server type.
l Function, Server ID, and Server Type are
associated with the servers that are
configured in Creating a RADIUS Server
or a RADIUS Proxy Server.
l Select the desired RADIUS server or proxy
server according to planning information.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

402

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Server Status

Active

Active

Specifies the active/standby status of the


RADIUS server or proxy server.

Standby

l If no standby server is required, set Server


Status to Active.
l The OptiX RTN 910 supports one active
server and one standby server. If both the
active and standby servers are configured,
set Server Status of the active server to
Active and Server Status of the standby
server to Standby.
-

Shared Key

Specifies the key for communication between


an NE and the RADIUS server.
l Set Shared Key to the same value on the
NE and on the RADIUS server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server, Shared
Key is not available.

Interval of Packet
Transmission

3-10

Packet
Retransmission
Attempts

1-5

Specifies the number of packet retransmission


attempts and the interval between the attempts.
l If an NE does not receive the response from
the RADIUS server within a specific
period, the NE re-transmits the
authentication request for the configured
attempt times and at the configured
interval.
l It is recommended that Interval of Packet
Transmission and Packet
Retransmission Attempts take their
default values.

E.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server


This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS server configuration.

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE
RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the RADIUS Server Configuration tab.


The RADIUS Server Information dialog box is displayed.

3.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Click New.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

403

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Function

Authentication

Authentication

Accounting

Specifies the RADIUS function that an NE


needs to use.

Authentication +
Accounting

l For NE RADIUS authentication, select


Authentication.
l For both NE RADIUS authentication and
NE usage accounting, set this parameter to
Authentication + Accounting or
Accounting (when the Authentication
function has been enabled).

RADIUS Server

Server Type

RADIUS Server

Proxy Server

Specifies the server type used for NE RADIUS


authentication.
l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication
in the NAS mode or functions as a proxy
server, set Server Type to RADIUS
Server.
l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication
in the proxy NAS mode, set Server Type
to Proxy Server.

IP Address

Server ID

NE ID

IP Address

Specifies the address of the server that is used


for NE RADIUS authentication.
l If Server Type is RADIUS Server, set
Server ID to IP Address and specify the
IP address of the RADIUS server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server, it is
recommended that you set Server ID to
NE ID and set the gateway NE as the proxy
server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server and there
is no IP route between the NE and the proxy
server, Server ID can be set to only NE
ID. If Server Type is Proxy Server and
there is an IP route between the NE and the
proxy server, Server ID can be set to NE
ID or IP Address.

E.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function


This topic describes the parameters that are required for enabling/disabling the RADIUS
function.

Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE
RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

404

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

Displays the NE name.

RADIUS Client

Open

Close

Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be


a RADIUS client. The RADIUS function can
be enabled on an NE only if RADIUS Client
is set to Open for the NE.

Close

Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be


a proxy server.

Close

Proxy Server

Open
Close

l If an NE needs to function as a proxy


server, set Proxy Server to Open for the
NE.
l Proxy Server can be set to Open only if
RADIUS Client is set to Open.
l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication
in the proxy NAS mode, set Proxy
Server to Close.

E.2 Radio Link Parameters


This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.

E.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC


Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the XPIC tab.

3.

Click New.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

405

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IF Channel
Bandwidth

ISX2:

l This parameter specifies the channel


spacing when the XPIC function is
enabled.

7M
14M

l When this parameter is set to 56M or


40M, the high-power ODU must be
used.

28M
40M
56M
IFX2:
7M
14M
28M
56M
Polarization
Direction-V

l This parameter indicates the polarization


direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you set the IF port
on the XPIC IF board that has a smaller
slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port
on the other XPIC IF board to Link IDH.

1 to 4094

l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.


l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link
and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and
Link ID-H must also be set to the same
value at both ends of a link.

Polarization
Direction-H

Link ID-V
Link ID-H

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

406

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Transmit Power
(dBm)

l This parameter specifies the transmit


power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)

l This parameter specifies the maximum


transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Transmission
Frequency(MHz)

l This parameter indicates the channel


central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

407

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

T/R Spacing(MHz)

l This parameter specifies the spacing


between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the transmit frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the transmit frequency is one
T/R spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.

Transmission
Status

unmute
mute

unmute

l When this parameter is set to mute, the


ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute,
the ODU normally transmits and
receives microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Transmission Status is
set to unmute.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

408

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ATPC Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the


ATPC function is enabled.

Enabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if


the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)

-45.0

ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)

-70.0

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

l The central value between the ATPC


upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold
and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status is set to
Disabled.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

409

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the


ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.

Enabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the


equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.

E.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the XPIC tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Group ID

This parameter indicates the ID of the work


group.

Polarization
Direction-V

This parameter indicates the IF port to which


the polarization direction V corresponds.

Link ID-V

This parameter indicates the link ID to


which the polarization direction V
corresponds.

Polarization
Direction-H

This parameter indicates the IF port to which


the polarization direction H corresponds.

Link ID-H

This parameter indicates the link ID to


which the polarization direction H
corresponds.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

410

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IF Channel
Bandwidth

ISX2:

l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the


channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.

7M
14M

l When this parameter is set to 56M or


40M, the high-power ODU must be
used.

28M
40M
56M

l This parameter is set according to the


planning information.

IFX2:
7M
14M
28M
56M
Power to Be
Received -V(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l This parameter is used to set the


expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

411

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Power to Be
Received -H(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l This parameter is used to set the


expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)

l This parameter specifies the maximum


transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

412

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Transmit Power
(dBm)

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Transmission
Frequency(MHz)

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower TX
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

413

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

T/R Spacing(MHz)

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.

Transmission
Status

unmute

unmute

mute

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Group ID

This parameter indicates the ID of the work


group.

Polarization
direction

This parameter indicates the IF port to which


the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

414

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

AM Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l When AM Enable Status is set to


Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.

Enabled

l When AM Enable Status is set to


Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity

QPSK

16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM

This parameter specifies the highest-gain


modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AM


Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity

QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM

This parameter specifies the highest-gain


modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AM


Enable Status is set to Enabled.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

415

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Manually Specified
Modulation Mode

QPSK

This parameter specifies the modulation


scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.

16QAM
32QAM

This parameter is valid only when AM


Enable Status is set to Disabled.

64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Transmit-End
Modulation Mode

Displays the modulation mode at the


transmit end.

Receive-End
Modulation Mode

Displays the modulation mode at the receive


end.

Parameters for ATPC Management


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Group ID

This parameter indicates the object to be set.

ATPC Enable
Status

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the


ATPC function is enabled.

Enabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if


the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

l Set the central value between the ATPC


upper threshold and the ATPC lower

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

416

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)

threshold to a value for the expected


receive power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.

ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the


ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.

Enabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the


equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).

E.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create


This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Create.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

417

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time.


l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.

Enabled

SD Switching

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the


signal degradation switching function of
N+1 protection is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the signal degradation condition is
considered as a trigger condition of
protection switching.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Select Mapping
Direction

Work Unit

Work Unit

l This parameter specifies the mapping


direction of N+1 protection.

Protection Unit

l This parameter is set according to the


planning information.
Select Mapping
Way

l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF


ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Mapped Board

This parameter indicates the working unit


and protection unit that have been set.

E.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection


This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

418

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.

Protection Group Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group
ID

This parameter indicates the ID of the


protection group.

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.

SD Switching

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies


whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection
switching.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.

Protocol Status

This parameter indicates the status of the


switching control protocol.

Protection Unit Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Unit Type

This parameter indicates the type of the unit.

Line-Side Port

This parameter indicates the information


about the working board or protection
board.

Switching Status

This parameter indicates the switching state.

Protected Unit

This parameter indicates the protected unit.

Remote/Local End
Indication

This parameter indicates the local end or


remote end.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

419

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

E.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create


This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Create.

Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Working Mode

HSB

HSB

l This parameter specifies the working


mode of the IF 1+1 protection.

FD
SD

l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the


equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby
configuration for the IF board and ODU
at both ends of each hop of a radio link
to realize the protection.
l When Working Mode is set to FD, the
system uses two channels that have a
frequency spacing between them, to
transmit and receive the same signal. The
remote end selects signals from the two
received signals. With FD protection, the
impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l When Working Mode is set to SD, the
system uses two antennas that have a
space distance between them, to receive
the same signal. The equipment selects
signals from the two received signals.
With SD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

420

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode

l This parameter specifies the revertive


mode of the IF 1+1 protection.

Non-Revertive

l When Revertive Mode is set to


Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal. It is recommended
that you set this parameter to Revertive
Mode.
l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time.


l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode. It is recommended that you use
the default value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

421

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable Reverse
Switching

Enabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates whether the


reverse switching function is enabled.

Disabled

l When both the main IF board and the


standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
Enable Reverse Switching at the source
end is set to Enabled and the reverse
switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1
protection switching occurs at the source
end.
l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only
when Working Mode is set to HSB or
SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to
HSB, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Disabled; if Working Mode is set to
SD, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Enabled.
Working Board

This parameter specifies the working board


of the protection group.

Protection Board

This parameter specifies the protection


board of the protection group.

Alarm Report
Mode

Only board alarms

Only board alarms

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to


Only board alarms, only IF board
alarms are reported.

Only protection
group alarms
Protection group
and board alarms

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to


Only protection group alarms,
protection group alarms are reported if a
protection group fails or degrades.
Service alarms on IF boards and radio
links are suppressed.
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Protection group and board alarms,
IF board alarms and protection group
alarms are reported.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection
group alarms. In this case, protection
group alarms are reported to indicate
radio link faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

422

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Anti-jitter Time(s)

0 to 600

300

l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,


a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.
NOTE
Anti-jitter Time(s) is valid only for alarms
reported when a protection group degrades.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s), and Enable
Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

E.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection


This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.

Protection Group Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group
ID

This parameter indicates the ID of the


protection group.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

423

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Working Mode

HSB

l This parameter indicates the working


mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.

FD
SD

l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a


1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive
the same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD
protection, the impact of the fading on
signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


revertive mode of the protection group.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive Mode.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

424

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.

Enable Reverse
Switching

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies


whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.

NE Switching
Status

l This parameter indicates the switching


state on the equipment side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.

Channel Switching
Status

l This parameter indicates the switching


state on the channel side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.

Active Port of
Device

This parameter indicates the current


working board on the equipment side.

Active Port of
Channel

This parameter indicates the current


working board on the channel side.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

425

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Alarm Report
Mode

Only board alarms

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to


Only board alarms, only IF board
alarms are reported.

Only Protection
group alarms

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to


Only protection group alarms,
protection group alarms are reported if a
protection group fails or degrades.
Service alarms on IF boards and radio
links are suppressed.

Protection group
and board alarms

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to


Protection group and board alarms, IF
board alarms and protection group
alarms are reported.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection group
alarms. In this case, protection group
alarms are reported to indicate radio link
faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time (s)

0 to 600

l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,


a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), Anti-jitter Time (s), and
Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Unit

This parameter indicates the working board


and protection board.

Slot Mapping
Relation

This parameter indicates the names and


ports of the working board and protection
board.

Working Status of
Device

This parameter indicates the working state


on the equipment side.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

426

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Signal Status of
Channel

This parameter indicates the status of the


link signal.

E.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA


Group
This topic describes the parameters for creating a PLA group.

Navigation Path
1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Parameters for Creating a PLA group


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PLA ID

This parameter specifies the ID of a PLA


group.

Main Board

This parameter specifies the main IF board


in a PLA group.

Main Port

This parameter specifies the main port in a


PLA group.

Board

This parameter specifies the slave IF board


in a PLA group.

Port

This parameter specifies the slave port in a


PLA group.

Selected Slave
Ports

This parameter displays the slave IF board


and slave port that have been selected.

E.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA


This topic describes PLA parameters.

Navigation Path
1.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

427

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

PLA Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PLA ID

This parameter displays the ID of a PLA


group.

Main Board

This parameter displays the main IF board


in a PLA group.

Main Port

This parameter displays the main port in a


PLA group.

Hardware Status
of Main Port

This parameter displays whether the main IF


board in a PLA group is functional.

Link Status of
Main Port

This parameter displays whether the main


link in a PLA group is functional.

Work Status of
Main Port

This parameter displays the working status


of the main port in a PLA group.

Minimum Active
Links

Minimum Active Links specifies the


minimum number of available links in a
PLA group and helps to trigger ERPS
switching even if not all members in the PLA
group fail
For example, if you set Minimum Active
Links to 2, ERPS switching is triggered
when either PLA member link fails.

Slave Board

This parameter displays the slave IF board


in a PLA group.

Slave Port

This parameter displays the slave port in a


PLA group.

Hardware Status
of Slave Port

This parameter displays whether the slave IF


board in a PLA group is functional.

Link Status of
Slave Port

This parameter displays whether the slave


link in a PLA group is functional.

Work Status of
Slave Port

This parameter displays the working status


of the slave port in a PLA group.

E.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration


This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path
1.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

428

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

2.

E Parameters Description

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Parameters for Configuring the IF


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Work Mode

1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


work mode of the radio link in "work
mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.

2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK

l This parameter is set according to the


network plan. The work modes of the IF
boards at the two ends of a radio link
must be the same.
NOTE
The IF1 board supports this parameter.

6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

429

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Link ID

1 to 4094

l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of


a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
link, this parameter is used to prevent
incorrect connections of radio links
between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to
the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do
not match.
l Link ID is set according to the network
plan. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at
both ends of a radio link should be the
same.

Received Link ID

l This parameter indicates the received ID


of the radio link.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH)
SDH

Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)

l Displays or specifies the type of services


carried by the IF board.
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native E1 services, set this parameter to
Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

430

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IF Channel
Bandwidth

3.5M

IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the


channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

7M
14M
28M

NOTE

40M

l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1


board.

56M

l The IFU2 board does not support the value


40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
40M.
l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M
only for the ISU2 board.

AM Mode

This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX


RTN 910.

AM Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l When AM Enable Status is set to


Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.

Enabled

l When AM Enable Status is set to


Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M
for the ISU2 board, the AM function is
unavailable and AM Enable Status
must be set to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Manually Specified
Modulation Mode

QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

QPSK

l This parameter specifies the modulation


scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

431

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity

QPSK

QPSK

l This parameter is valid only when AM


Enable Status is set to Enabled.

16QAM

l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee


AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according
to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.

32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM

NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity

QPSK

QPSK

16QAM

l This parameter is valid only when AM


Enable Status is set to Enabled.
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity specifies the highest-order
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according
to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.

32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM

NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

STM-1 Capacity

l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF


board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support
this parameter.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

432

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Guarantee E1
Capacity

l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,


this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Guarantee E1
Capacity Range

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF


board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.

Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)

Displays the data service bandwidth of the


IF board.

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether to


enable the E1 priority function.

Enabled

l This parameter is valid only when AM


Enable Status is set to Enabled.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

433

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Full E1 Capacity

l This parameter specifies the number of


transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Full E1 Capacity
Range

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF


board in full capacity modulation mode.

Parameters for Configuring the RF


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TX Frequency
(MHz)

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower TX
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the network plan.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

434

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Range of TX
Frequency(MHz)

l This parameter indicates the range of the


transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.

Actual TX
Frequency(MHz)

This parameter indicates the actual transmit


frequency of the ODU.

Actual RX
Frequency(MHz)

This parameter indicates the actual receive


frequency of the ODU.

T/R Spacing(MHz)

l This parameter specifies the spacing


between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.

Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

This parameter indicates the actual T/R


spacing of the ODU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

435

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters for Configuring the Power


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TX Power(dBm)

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the network plan.

Range of TX
Power(dBm)

This parameter indicates the range of the


transmit power of the ODU.

Actual TX Power
(dBm)

l This parameter indicates the actual


transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

436

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Power to Be
Received(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to


set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
antenna misalignment indicating
function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, When the
antenna non-alignment indication
function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the
power expected to be received, the ODU
indicator on the IF board connected to
the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300
ms off), indicating that the antenna is not
aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When Power to Be Received(dBm)
takes the default value (-10.0), the
antenna misalignment indicating
function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

Actual RX Power
(dBm)

This parameter indicates the actual receive


power of the ODU.

TX Status

Unmute

Unmute

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


transmit status of the ODU.

Mute

l When this parameter is set to Mute, the


transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set TX Status to unmute.
Actual TX Status

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

This parameter indicates the actual transmit


status of the ODU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

437

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Equipment Information
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Frequency(GHz)

This parameter indicates the frequency band


where the ODU operates.

Equip Type

l This parameter indicates the equipment


type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.

Station Type

l This parameter indicates whether the


ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Produce SN

This parameter indicates the manufacturing


serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.

Transmission
Power Level

This parameter indicates the level of the


output power of the ODU.

E.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters


This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).

E.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation


This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Create.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

438

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default
Value

Description

Protection Type

1+1 Protection

1+1 Protection

l This parameter specifies the


protection type of the linear
MSP group.

1:N Protection

l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP,


one working channel and one
protection channel are
required. When the working
channel fails, the service is
switched from the working
channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP,
N working channels and one
protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working
channels and extra services
are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one
working channel fails, the
services are switched from
this working channel to the
protection channel, and the
extra services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be
transmitted or several
working channels are
required, select 1:N
Protection.
l This parameter is set
according to the planning
information.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

439

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default
Value

Description

Switching Mode

Single-Ended
Switching

Single-Ended
Switching (1
+1 Protection)

l This parameter specifies the


switching mode of the linear
MSP.

Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
Protection)

l In single-ended mode, the


switching occurs only at one
end and the state of the other
end remains unchanged.

Dual-Ended
Switching

l In dual-ended mode, the


switching occurs at both ends
at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Switching
Mode can be set to DualEnded Switching only.
Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive
Revertive

Non-Revertive
(1+1
Protection)

l This parameter specifies the


revertive mode of the linear
MSP.

Revertive (1:N
Protection)

l When this parameter is set to


Revertive, the NE that is in
the switching state releases
the switching and enables the
former working channel to
return to the normal state
some time after the former
working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to
Non-Revertive, the NE that
is in the switching state keeps
the current state unchanged
unless another switching
occurs even though the
former working channel is
restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you
set this parameter to
Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Revertive
Mode can be set to
Revertive only.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

440

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default
Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the


WTR time.
l When the time after the
former working channel is
restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive
switching occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s)
only when Revertive Mode
is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you
use the default value.

SD Enable

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or


specifies whether the
switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to
Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is
considered as a switching
condition.
l It is recommended that you
set this parameter to
Enabled.

Protocol Type

New Protocol

New Protocol

Restructure
Protocol

l The new protocol is


supported at the early stage,
and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol
optimizes the new protocol
and provides better measures
to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new
protocol runs in a better
manner.
l The new protocol is more
mature, and the restructure
protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended
that you use the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the
interconnected NEs run the
protocols of the same type.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

441

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Select Mapping
Direction

West Working Unit

West Working Unit

This parameter specifies the mapping


direction of the linear MSP.

Select Mapping
Mode

l This parameter specifies the mapping


board and port in the mapping direction.

West Protection
Unit

l If the protection type is set to 1+1


Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as
West Protection Unit.
l The line port mapped as West
Protection Unit and the line port
mapped as West Working Unit should
be configured for different boards if
possible.
-

Mapped Board

This parameter indicates the preset slot


mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.

E.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP


This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group
ID

This parameter indicates the ID of the


protection group.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

442

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

l This parameter indicates the protection


type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched
from the working channel to the
protection channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working channels and
extra services are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one working
channel fails, the services are switched
from this working channel to the
protection channel, and the extra
services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted
or several working channels are
required, select 1:N Protection.

Switching Mode

Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


switching mode of the linear MSP.
l In single-ended mode, the switching
occurs only at one end and the state of
the other end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the switching
occurs at both ends at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

443

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


revertive mode of the linear MSP.

Revertive

l When this parameter is set to


Revertive, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal.
l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

l This parameter indicates or specifies the


WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.

SD Enable

Enabled
Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies


whether the reverse switching function
is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

444

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protocol Type

New Protocol

l The new protocol is supported at the


early stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.

Restructure Protocol

l The restructure protocol optimizes the


new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and
the restructure protocol complies with
the standard. It is recommended that you
use the new protocol.
Protocol Status

This parameter indicates the protocol status


of the linear MSP.

Protection Subnet

This parameter displays the protection


subnet where the MS protection is
configured.

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Unit Type

This parameter indicates that which of the


units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the
protection status.

Unit Name-West

This parameter indicates the west protection


unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.

Switching StatusWest

This parameter indicates the switching


status of the line.

Protected Unit

This parameter indicates the working


channel protected by the current protection
channel.

Remote End/Local
End

When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

445

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

E.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters


This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.

E.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation


This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.

3.

Click Create.

Parameters
Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Level

VC12

VC12

l This parameter specifies the level of the


service to be created.

VC3

l If the service is an E1 service or a data


service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.

VC4

l If the service is a data service that is


bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Unidirectional

l When this parameter is set to


Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to
the service sink.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to
the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the
service source.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

This parameter specifies the slot of the


service source.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

446

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source VC4

l This parameter specifies the number of


the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.

Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

l This parameter indicates the timeslot


range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

Sink Slot

This parameter specifies the slot of the


service sink.

Sink VC4

l This parameter specifies the number of


the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.

Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

l This parameter specifies the timeslot


range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

447

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

E1 Priority

High

l This parameter specifies the priority of


an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.

Low
None

l If E1 Priority is set to High,


transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Yes

Activate
Immediately

Yes

No

l This parameter specifies whether to


immediately activate the configured
service.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.

E.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP


Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.

3.

Click Create SNCP Service.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Type

SNCP

SNCP

This parameter indicates that the type of the


service to be created is SNCP.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

448

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

l When this parameter is set to


Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.

Unidirectional

l When this parameter is set to


Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Level

VC12
VC3
VC4

VC12

l This parameter specifies the level of the


SCNP service to be created.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

449

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Hold-off Time
(100ms)

0 to 100

l This parameter specifies the duration of


the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set
to prevent SNCP protection switching,
when SNCP works with N+1 protection.
Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer
than the switching time of any protection
mode that works with SNCP. Generally,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.
l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,
trigger conditions for HSM switching or
SNCP switching trigger HSM switching
but do not trigger SNCP switching.
Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does
not need to be set in this case.
l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection is much longer than that of
SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service
interruptions, it is recommended that you
do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when
SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive
Revertive

Non-Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to


switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

450

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the WTR time.


l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.

Source Slot

This parameter specifies the slot of the


service source.

Source VC4

l This parameter specifies the number of


the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.

Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

l This parameter indicates the timeslot


range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Sink Slot

This parameter specifies the slot of the


service sink.

Sink VC4

l This parameter specifies the number of


the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

451

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

l This parameter specifies the timeslot


range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Selected

Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring

Deselected

Deselected

l After the Configure SNCP Tangent


Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you do not select this checkbox.

Selected

Activate
Immediately

Deselected

Selected

l This parameter specifies whether to


immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.

E.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service


Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.

Navigation Path
1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Optional: If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in CrossConnection. Right-click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from
the shortcut menu.

3.

Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

452

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Type

SNCP

SNCP

This parameter indicates that the type of the


service to be created is SNCP.

Direction

Unidirectional

This parameter indicates the direction of the


SNCP service.

Level

l This parameter indicates the level of the


SNCP service.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, the parameter value is VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, the
parameter value is VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, the parameter value is
VC4.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

453

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Hold-off Time
(100ms)

0 to 100

l This parameter specifies the duration of


the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set
to prevent SNCP protection switching,
when SNCP works with N+1 protection.
Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer
than the switching time of any protection
mode that works with SNCP. Generally,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.
l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,
trigger conditions for HSM switching or
SNCP switching trigger HSM switching
but do not trigger SNCP switching.
Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does
not need to be set in this case.
l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection is much longer than that of
SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service
interruptions, it is recommended that you
do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when
SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive
Revertive

Non-Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to


switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

454

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the WTR time.


l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.

Source Slot

This parameter specifies the slot of the


service source.

Source VC4

l This parameter specifies the number of


the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.

Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

l This parameter indicates the timeslot


range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Sink Slot

This parameter specifies the slot of the


service sink.

Sink VC4

l This parameter specifies the number of


the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

455

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


IDU Hardware Description

E Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

l This parameter specifies the timeslot


range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring

After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring


checkbox is selected, you can quickly
configure the SNCP service for the SNCP
ring tangent point.

Activate
Immediately

l This parameter indicates whether to